l Commands
l2pt-termination
l2pt-termination
Syntax
l2pt-termination [cdp] [dtp] [pagp] [stp] [udld] [vtp]
no l2pt-termination
Context
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-sap-template l2pt-termination)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp l2pt-termination)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap l2pt-termination)
Full Context
configure service template vpls-sap-template l2pt-termination
configure service vpls spoke-sdp l2pt-termination
configure service vpls sap l2pt-termination
Description
This command enables Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT) termination on a specified SAP or spoke-SDP. L2PT termination is supported only for STP BPDUs. PDUs of other protocols are discarded.
This feature can be enabled only if STP is disabled in the context of the specified VPLS service.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Default
no l2pt-termination
Parameters
- cdp
-
Specifies the Cisco discovery protocol
- dtp
-
Specifies the dynamic trunking protocol
- pagp
-
Specifies the port aggregation protocol
- stp
-
Specifies all spanning tree protocols: stp, rstp, mstp, pvst (default)
- udld
-
Specifies unidirectional link detection
- vtp
-
Specifies the virtual trunk protocol
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
l2pt-termination
Syntax
l2pt-termination [cdp] [dtp] [pagp] [stp] [udld] [vtp]
no l2pt-termination
Context
[Tree] (config>service>pw-template l2pt-termination)
Full Context
configure service pw-template l2pt-termination
Description
This command enables Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT) termination on a given SAP or spoke SDP. L2PT termination will be supported only for STP BPDUs. PDUs of other protocols will be discarded.
This feature can be enabled only if STP is disabled in the context of the given VPLS service.
Default
no l2pt-termination
Parameters
- cdp
-
Specifies the Cisco discovery protocol.
- dtp
-
Specifies the dynamic trunking protocol.
- pagp
-
Specifies the port aggregation protocol.
- stp
-
Specifies all spanning tree protocols: stp, rstp, mstp, pvst (default).
- udld
-
Specifies unidirectional link detection.
- vtp
-
Specifies the virtual trunk protocol.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
l2tp
l2tp
Syntax
[no] l2tp
Context
[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>sync l2tp)
Full Context
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer sync l2tp
Description
This command enables L2TP.
The no form of this command disables L2TP.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
l3-ring
l3-ring
Syntax
l3-ring name [create]
no l3-ring name
Context
[Tree] (config>redundancy>mc>peer>mcr l3-ring)
Full Context
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-ring l3-ring
Description
This command configures a Layer 3 multi-chassis ring.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
l4-load-balancing
l4-load-balancing
Syntax
[no] l4-load-balancing
Context
[Tree] (config>system>load-balancing l4-load-balancing)
Full Context
configure system load-balancing l4-load-balancing
Description
This command configures system-wide Layer 4 load balancing. The configuration at the system level can enable or disable load balancing based on Layer 4 fields. If enabled, the Layer 4 source and destination port fields will be included in hashing calculation for TCP/UDP packets.
The hashing algorithm addresses finer spraying granularity where many hosts are connected to the network.
To address more efficient traffic distribution between network links (forming a LAG group), a hashing algorithm extension takes into account L4 information (that is, src/dst L4-protocol port).
The hashing index can be calculated according to the following algorithm:
- Example:
-
— If [(TCP or UDP traffic) & enabled]
— hash (TCP/UDP ports, IP addresses)
— else if (IP traffic)
— hash (IP addresses)
— else
— hash (MAC addresses)
— endif
This algorithm will be used in all cases where IP information in per-packet hashing is included (refer to "Traffic Load Balancing Options" in the 7705 SAR Gen 2 Interface Configuration Guide). However, the Layer 4 information (TCP/UDP ports) will not be used for fragmented packets.
Default
no l4-load-balancing
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
l4-src-port
l4-src-port
Syntax
l4-src-port port [mask]
no l4-src-port
Context
[Tree] (config>system>security>mgmt-access-filter>ipv6-filter>entry l4-src-port)
[Tree] (config>system>security>mgmt-access-filter>ip-filter>entry l4-src-port)
Full Context
configure system security management-access-filter ipv6-filter entry l4-src-port
configure system security management-access-filter ip-filter entry l4-src-port
Description
This command configures a destination TCP or UDP port number or port range for a management access filter match criterion.
The no form of this command reverts to the default values.
Default
no l4-src-port
Parameters
- port
-
Specifies the destination TCP or UDP port number as a match criterion.
- mask
-
Specifies the mask used to select a range of source port numbers. Format Styles to Configure Mask lists the format styles to configure the 16-bit mask.
Table 1. Format Styles to Configure Mask Format Style
Format Syntax
Example
Decimal
DDDDD
63488
Hexadecimal
0xHHHH
0xF800
Binary
0bBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
0b1111100000000000
To select a range from 1024 up to 2047, specify 1024 and 0xFC00 for port and mask, respectively.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label
label
Syntax
label [detail]
no label
Context
[Tree] (debug>router>ldp>peer>packet label)
Full Context
debug router ldp peer packet label
Description
This command enables debugging for LDP Label packets.
The no form of the command disables the debugging output.
Parameters
- detail
-
Displays detailed information.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-allocation
label-allocation
Syntax
label-allocation
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp label-allocation)
Full Context
configure router bgp label-allocation
Description
This commands enables the context to configure the allocation of MPLS labels to specific BGP routes.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-ipv4
label-ipv4
Syntax
label-ipv4 max-paths [ebgp ebgp-max-paths] [ibgp ibgp-max-paths] [restrict {same-neighbor-as | exact-as-path}] [unequal-cost]
no label-ipv4
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>multi-path label-ipv4)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp multi-path label-ipv4
Description
This command sets ECMP multipath parameters that apply only to the label unicast IPv4 address family.
When multipath is enabled, traffic to the destination is load-shared across a set of paths (BGP routes) that the BGP decision process considers equal to the best path. The distribution of traffic over the multiple paths may or may not be equal. The distribution is based on weights derived from the Link Bandwidth Extended Community.
For more information about the criteria a non-best route must meet to qualify as a multipath, see "BGP route installation in the route table” in the 7705 SAR Gen 2 Unicast Routing Protocols Guide.
The no form of this command removes label-IPv4-specific overrides.
Default
no label-ipv4
Parameters
- max-paths
-
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI. Setting this value to 1 disables multipath. This limit only applies if neither the ebgp-max-paths limit nor the ibgp-max-paths limit apply.
- ebgp-max-paths
-
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an EBGP learned route. If the ebgp option is configured, this value overrides the max-paths limit. If the best path is an EBGP learned route and this value is set to 1, multipath is disabled.
- ibgp-max-paths
-
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an IBGP learned route. If the ibgp option is configured, this value overrides the max-paths limit. If the best path is an IBGP learned route and this value is set to 1, multipath is disabled.
- restrict same-neighbor-as
-
Specifies that the non-best path must have the same neighbor AS in its AS path as the best path.
- restrict exact-as-path-as
-
Specifies that the non-best path must have the same AS path as the best path.
- unequal-cost
-
Instructs BGP to ignore differences in the next-hop cost only when determining eligible multipaths.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-ipv4
Syntax
label-ipv4 send send-limit
label-ipv4 send send-limit receive [none]
no label-ipv4
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>add-paths label-ipv4)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>add-paths label-ipv4)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor>add-paths label-ipv4)
Full Context
configure router bgp add-paths label-ipv4
configure router bgp group add-paths label-ipv4
configure router bgp group neighbor add-paths label-ipv4
Description
This command configures the add-paths capability for labeled-unicast IPv4 routes. By default, add-paths is not enabled for labeled-unicast IPv4 routes.
The maximum number of labeled-unicast paths per IPv4 prefix to send is the configured send-limit, which is a mandatory parameter. The capability to receive multiple labeled-unicast paths per prefix from a peer is configurable using the receive keyword, which is optional. If the receive keyword is not included in the command, receive capability is enabled by default.
The no form of this command disables add-paths support for labeled-unicast IPv4 routes, causing sessions established using add-paths for labeled-unicast IPv4 to go down and come back up without the add-paths capability.
Default
no label-ipv4
Parameters
- send-limit
-
Specifies the maximum number of paths per labeled-unicast IPv4 prefix that are allowed to be advertised to add-paths peers. (The actual number of advertised routes may be less.) If the value is none, the router does not negotiate the send capability with respect to label-IPv4 AFI/SAFI. If the value is multipaths, then BGP advertises all the used BGP multipaths for each IPv4 NLRI if the peer has signaled support to receive multiple add paths.
- receive
-
Specifies the router negotiates to receive multiple labeled-unicast routes per IPv4 prefix.
- none
-
Specifies that the router does not negotiate to receive multiple labeled-unicast routes per IPv4 prefix.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-ipv4
Syntax
label-ipv4 max-paths [ebgp ebgp-max-paths] [ibgp ibgp-max-paths] [restrict {same-neighbor-as | exact-as-path}] [unequal-cost]
no label-ipv4
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>multi-path label-ipv4)
Full Context
configure router bgp multi-path label-ipv4
Description
This command sets ECMP multipath parameters that apply only to the label IPv4 unicast address family. These settings override the values set by the maximum-paths command.
When multipath is enabled, traffic to the destination is load-shared across a set of paths (BGP routes) that the BGP decision process considers equal to the best path. The actual distribution of traffic over the multiple paths may be equal or unequal (that is, based on weights derived from the Link Bandwidth Extended Community).
The no form of this command removes label-IPv4-specific overrides.
Default
no label-ipv4
Parameters
- max-paths
-
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix/NLRI if ebgp-max-paths or ibgp-max-paths does not apply.
- ebgp-max-paths
-
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an EBGP learned route.
- ibgp-max-paths
-
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an IBGP learned route.
- restrict same-neighbor-as
-
Specifies that the non-best path must have the same neighbor AS in its AS path as the best path.
- restrict exact-as-path
-
Specifies that the non-best path must have the same AS path as the best path.
- unequal-cost
-
Instructs BGP to ignore differences in the next-hop cost only when determining eligible multipaths.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-ipv6
label-ipv6
Syntax
label-ipv6 max-paths [ebgp ebgp-max-paths] [ibgp ibgp-max-paths] [restrict {same-neighbor-as | exact-as-path}] [unequal-cost]
no label-ipv6
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>multi-path label-ipv6)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp multi-path label-ipv6
Description
This command sets ECMP multipath parameters that apply only to the label unicast IPv6 address family.
When multipath is enabled, traffic to the destination is load-shared across a set of paths (BGP routes) that the BGP decision process considers equal to the best path. The distribution of traffic over the multiple paths may or may not be equal. The distribution is based on weights derived from the Link Bandwidth Extended Community.
For more information about the criteria a non-best route must meet to qualify as a multipath, see "BGP route installation in the route table” in the 7705 SAR Gen 2 Unicast Routing Protocols Guide.
The no form of this command removes label-IPv6-specific overrides.
Default
no label-ipv6
Parameters
- max-paths
-
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI. Setting this value to 1 disables multipath. This limit only applies if neither the ebgp-max-paths limit nor the ibgp-max-paths limit apply.
- ebgp-max-paths
-
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an EBGP learned route. If the ebgp option is configured, this value overrides the max-paths limit. If the best path is an EBGP learned route and this value is set to 1, multipath is disabled.
- ibgp-max-paths
-
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an IBGP learned route. If the ibgp option is configured, this value overrides the max-paths limit. If the best path is an IBGP learned route and this value is set to 1, multipath is disabled.
- restrict same-neighbor-as
-
Specifies that the non-best path must have the same neighbor AS in its AS path as the best path.
- restrict exact-as-path-as
-
Specifies that the non-best path must have the same AS path as the best path.
- unequal-cost
-
Instructs BGP to ignore differences in the next-hop cost only when determining eligible multipaths.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-ipv6
Syntax
label-ipv6 send send-limit
label-ipv6 send send-limit receive [none]
no label-ipv6
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor>add-paths label-ipv6)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>add-paths label-ipv6)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>add-paths label-ipv6)
Full Context
configure router bgp group neighbor add-paths label-ipv6
configure router bgp group add-paths label-ipv6
configure router bgp add-paths label-ipv6
Description
This command configures the add-paths capability for labeled-unicast IPv6 routes. By default, add-paths is not enabled for labeled-unicast IPv6 routes.
The maximum number of labeled-unicast paths per IPv6 prefix to send is the configured send-limit, which is a mandatory parameter. The capability to receive multiple labeled-unicast paths per prefix from a peer is configurable using the receive keyword, which is optional. If the receive keyword is not included in the command, receive capability is enabled by default.
The no form of this command disables add-paths support for labeled-unicast IPv6 routes, causing sessions established using add-paths for labeled-unicast IPv6 to go down and come back up without the add-paths capability.
Default
no label-ipv6
Parameters
- send-limit
-
Specifies the maximum number of paths per labeled-unicast IPv6 prefix that are allowed to be advertised to add-paths peers. (The actual number of advertised routes may be less.) If the value is none, the router does not negotiate the send capability with respect to label-IPv6 AFI/SAFI. If the value is multipaths, then BGP advertises all the used BGP multipaths for each IPv6 NLRI if the peer has signaled support to receive multiple add paths.
- receive
-
Specifies that the router negotiates to receive multiple labeled-unicast routes per IPv6 prefix.
- none
-
Specifies that the router does not negotiate to receive multiple labeled-unicast routes per IPv6 prefix.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-ipv6
Syntax
label-ipv6 max-paths [ebgp ebgp-max-paths] [ibgp ibgp-max-paths] [restrict {same-neighbor-as | exact-as-path}] [unequal-cost]
no label-ipv6
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>multi-path label-ipv6)
Full Context
configure router bgp multi-path label-ipv6
Description
This command sets ECMP multipath parameters that apply only to the label unicast IPv6 address family. These settings override the values set by the maximum-paths command.
When multipath is enabled, traffic to the destination is load-shared across a set of paths (BGP routes) that the BGP decision process considers equal to the best path. The actual distribution of traffic over the multiple paths may be equal or unequal (that is, based on weights derived from the Link Bandwidth Extended Community).
The no form of this command removes label-IPv6-specific overrides.
Default
no label-ipv6
Parameters
- max-paths
-
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix/NLRI if ebgp-max-paths or ibgp-max-paths does not apply.
- ebgp-max-paths
-
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an EBGP learned route.
- ibgp-max-paths
-
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an IBGP learned route.
- restrict same-neighbor-as
-
Specifies that the non-best path must have the same neighbor AS in its AS path as the best path.
- restrict exact-as-path
-
Specifies that the non-best path must have the same AS path as the best path.
- unequal-cost
-
Instructs BGP to ignore differences in the next-hop cost only when determining eligible multipaths.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-ipv6
Syntax
label-ipv6
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>label-allocation label-ipv6)
Full Context
configure router bgp label-allocation label-ipv6
Description
Commands in this context configure advertised label IPv6 programming rules.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-ipv6
Syntax
label-ipv6
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>rib-management label-ipv6)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp rib-management label-ipv6
Description
Commands in this context configure labeled IPv6 RIB.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-ipv6-explicit-null
label-ipv6-explicit-null
Syntax
[no] label-ipv6-explicit-null
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>next-hop-res>lbl-routes>use-bgp-routes label-ipv6-explicit-null)
Full Context
configure router bgp next-hop-resolution labeled-routes use-bgp-routes label-ipv6-explicit-null
Description
This command allows a labelled IPv6 route with the explicit-null label to be resolved by other labelled IPv6 routes with the explicit-null label, and also by unlabeled IPv4 routes and unlabeled IPv6 routes that are resolved by static routes, interface routes, or tunnels. Up to four levels of recursive resolution are supported when the top route is a labelled IPv6 route with an explicit-null label.
Regardless of setting, a labelled IPv6 route with a regular label (other than explicit-null) is never resolved by other labelled IPv6 routes.
The no form of this command disables the label-ipv6-explicit-null functionality. When disabled, a labeled IPv6 route cannot be resolved by other labeled IPv6 routes.
Default
no label-ipv6-explicit-null
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-map
label-map
Syntax
[no] label-map in-label
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>interface label-map)
Full Context
configure router mpls interface label-map
Description
This command is used on transit routers when a static LSP is defined. The static LSP on the ingress router is initiated using the config router mpls static-lsp lsp-name command. An in-label can be associated with either a pop or a swap action, but not both. If both actions are specified, the last action specified takes effect.
The no form of this command deletes the static LSP configuration associated with the in-label.
Parameters
- in-label
-
Specifies the incoming MPLS label on which to match.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-mode
label-mode
Syntax
label-mode {vrf | next-hop}
no label-mode
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn label-mode)
Full Context
configure service vprn label-mode
Description
This command controls the method by which service labels are allocated to routes exported by the VPRN as BGP-VPN routes. The vrf option selects service label per VRF mode while the next-hop option selects service label per next-hop mode.
The no form of this command sets the mode to the default mode of service label per VRF.
Default
no label-mode
Parameters
- vrf
-
Selects service label per VRF mode.
- next-hop
-
Selects service label per next-hop mode.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-preference
label-preference
Syntax
label-preference value
no label-preference
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp label-preference)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group label-preference)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor label-preference)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp label-preference
configure service vprn bgp group label-preference
configure service vprn bgp group neighbor label-preference
Description
This command configures the route preference for routes learned from labeled-unicast peers.
This command can be configured at three levels:
-
Global level — applies to all peers
-
Group level — applies to all peers in the peer-group
-
Neighbor level — applies only to the specified peer
The most specific value is used.
The lower the preference, the higher the chance of the route being the active route.
The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to the default value of 170.
The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.
The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.
Default
no label-preference
Parameters
- value
-
Specifies the route preference value.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-preference
Syntax
label-preference value
no label-preference
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp label-preference)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group label-preference)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor label-preference)
Full Context
configure router bgp label-preference
configure router bgp group label-preference
configure router bgp group neighbor label-preference
Description
This command configures the route preference for routes learned from labeled-unicast peers.
This command can be configured at three levels:
-
Global level — applies to all peers
-
Group level — applies to all peers in the peer-group
-
Neighbor level — applies only to the specified peer
The most specific value is used.
The lower the preference, the higher the chance of the route being the active route.
The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to the default value of 170.
The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.
The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.
Default
no label-preference
Parameters
- value
-
Specifies the route preference value.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-route-local
label-route-local
Syntax
label-route-local [{none | all}]
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ttl-propagate label-route-local)
Full Context
configure router ttl-propagate label-route-local
Description
This command configures the TTL propagation for locally generated packets which are forwarded over a BGP label route in the Global Routing Table (GRT) context.
For IPv4 and IPv6 packets forwarded using an RFC 8277 label route in the global routing instance, including 6PE, the all value of the command enables TTL propagation from the IP header into all labels in the transport label stack. The none value reverts to the default mode which disables TTL propagation from the IP header to the labels in the transport label stack. This command does not have a no version.
The TTL of the IP packet is always propagated into the RFC 8277 label itself, and this command only controls the propagation into the transport labels, for example, labels of the RSVP or LDP LSP to which the BGP label route resolves and which are pushed on top of the BGP label.
If the BGP peer advertised the implicit-null label value for the BGP label route, the TTL propagation will not follow the configuration described, but will follow the configuration to which the BGP label route resolves:
RSVP LSP shortcut:
-
configure router mpls shortcut-local-ttl-propagate
LDP LSP shortcut:
-
configure router ldp shortcut-local-ttl-propagate
This feature does not impact packets forwarded over BGP shortcuts. The ingress LER operates in uniform mode by default and can be changed into pipe mode using the configuration of TTL propagation for RSVP or LDP LSP shortcut listed.
Default
label-route-local none
Parameters
- none
-
Specifies that the TTL of the IP packet is not propagated into the transport label stack.
- all
-
Specifies that the TTL of the IP packet is propagated into all labels of the transport label stack.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-route-transit
label-route-transit
Syntax
label-route-transit [{none | all}]
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ttl-propagate label-route-transit)
Full Context
configure router ttl-propagate label-route-transit
Description
This command configures the TTL propagation for transit packets which are forwarded over a BGP label route in the Global Routing Table (GRT) context.
For IPv4 and IPv6 packets forwarded using a RFC 8277 label route in the global routing instance, including 6PE, the all value of the command enables TTL propagation from the IP header into all labels in the transport label stack. The none value reverts to the default mode which disables TTL propagation from the IP header to the labels in the transport label stack. This command does not have a no version.
The TTL of the IP packet is always propagated into the RFC 8277 label itself, and this command only controls the propagation into the transport labels, for example, labels of the RSVP or LDP LSP to which the BGP label route resolves and which are pushed on top of the BGP label.
If the BGP peer advertised the implicit-null label value for the BGP label route, the TTL propagation will not follow the configuration described, but will follow the configuration to which the BGP label route resolves.
RSVP LSP shortcut:
-
configure router mpls shortcut-transit-ttl-propagate
LDP LSP shortcut:
-
configure router ldp shortcut-transit-ttl-propagate
This feature does not impact packets forwarded over BGP shortcuts. The ingress LER operates in uniform mode by default and can be changed into pipe mode using the configuration of TTL propagation for the listed RSVP or LDP LSP shortcut.
Default
label-route-transit none
Parameters
- none
-
Specifies that the TTL of the IP packet is not propagated into the transport label stack.
- all
-
Specifies that the TTL of the IP packet is propagated into all labels of the transport label stack.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-stack-reduction
label-stack-reduction
Syntax
[no] label-stack-reduction
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template label-stack-reduction)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp label-stack-reduction)
Full Context
configure router mpls lsp-template label-stack-reduction
configure router mpls lsp label-stack-reduction
Description
This command enables the label stack size reduction for a SR-TE LSP or SR-TE LSP template.
At a high level, the label stack reduction algorithm attempts to replace a segment of a computed SR-TE LSP path with the farthest node SID on that path that results in using ECMP paths with links which still comply to the TE constraints of the LSP path.
The no form of this command returns the command to its default value.
Default
no label-stack-reduction
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
label-withdrawal-delay
label-withdrawal-delay
Syntax
label-withdrawal-delay seconds
no label-withdrawal-delay
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ldp label-withdrawal-delay)
Full Context
configure router ldp label-withdrawal-delay
Description
This command specifies configures the time interval (in s), LDP will delay for the withdrawal of FEC-label binding it distributed to its neighbors when FEC is de-activated. When the timer expires, LDP then sends a label withdrawal for the FEC to all its neighbors. This is applicable only to LDP IPv4 prefix FECs and is not applicable to pseudowires (service FECs).
When there is an upper layer (user of LDP) which depends on LDP control plane for failover detection then label withdrawal delay and tunnel-down-damp-time options must be set to 0.
An example is PW redundancy where the primary PW doesn’t have its own fast failover detection mechanism and the node depends on LDP tunnel down event to activate the standby PW.
Default
no label-withdrawal-delay
Parameters
- seconds
-
Specifies the time that LDP delays the withdrawal of FEC-label binding it distributed to its neighbors when FEC is de-activated.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
labeled-routes
labeled-routes
Syntax
labeled-routes
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>next-hop-res labeled-routes)
Full Context
configure router bgp next-hop-resolution labeled-routes
Description
Commands in this context configure labeled route options for next-hop resolution.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lacp
lacp
Syntax
lacp [mode] [administrative-key admin-key] [system-id system-id] [system-priority priority]
no lacp
Context
[Tree] (config>lag lacp)
Full Context
configure lag lacp
Description
This command enables the LACP protocol. Per the IEEE 802.1ax standard, the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems on a link to allow their Link Aggregation Control instances to reach agreement on the identity of the Link Aggregation Group to which the link belongs, move the link to that Link Aggregation Group, and enable its transmission and reception functions in an orderly manner.
If any of the parameters are omitted, the existing configuration is preserved. The default parameter values are used if a parameter is never explicitly configured.
Default
no lacp
Parameters
- mode
-
Specifies the mode in which LACP will operate.
- admin-key
-
Specifies an administrative key value to identify the channel group on each port configured to use LACP. A random key is assigned by default if a value is not specified when using classic CLI only.
- system-id
-
Specifies the 48-bit system ID in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff, where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.
- priority
-
Specifies the system priority.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lacp-fallback
lacp-fallback
Syntax
lacp-fallback mode {static} [timeout timeout]
no lacp-fallback
Context
[Tree] (config>lag lacp-fallback)
Full Context
configure lag lacp-fallback
Description
This command configures the LACP fallback mode. LACP fallback allows one or more designated links of an LACP-controlled LAG to go into forwarding mode if LACP is not yet operational after a configured timeout period. Links capable of forwarding traffic assume the Ethernet and IP characteristics configured for the LAG.
The no form of this command disables LACP fallback.
Default
no lacp-fallback
Parameters
- mode
-
Keyword to specify the LACP fallback mode.
- timeout
-
Specifies the timeout period in seconds. The LACP link becomes active if no LACP PDUs are received within this timeout period.
Note: Timeout range depends on the configuration of the configure lag lacp-xmit-limit command.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lacp-mux-control
lacp-mux-control
Syntax
lacp-mux-control {coupled | independent}
no lacp-mux-control
Context
[Tree] (config>lag lacp-mux-control)
Full Context
configure lag lacp-mux-control
Description
This command configures the type of multiplexing machine control to be used in a LAG with LACP in active/passive modes.
The no form of this command disables multiplexing machine control.
Default
lacp-mux-control coupled
Parameters
- coupled
-
Specifies that TX and RX activate together.
- independent
-
Specifies that RX activates independent of TX.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lacp-system-priority
lacp-system-priority
Syntax
lacp-system-priority lacp-system-priority
no lacp-system-priority
Context
[Tree] (config>system lacp-system-priority)
Full Context
configure system lacp-system-priority
Description
This command configures the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) system priority on aggregated Ethernet interfaces. LACP allows the operator to aggregate multiple physical interfaces to form one logical interface.
Default
lacp-system-priority 32768
Parameters
- lacp-system-priority
-
Specifies the LACP system priority.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lacp-tunnel
lacp-tunnel
Syntax
[no] lacp-tunnel
Context
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet lacp-tunnel)
Full Context
configure port ethernet lacp-tunnel
Description
This command enables LACP packet tunneling for the Ethernet port. When tunneling is enabled, the port does not process any LACP packets but tunnels them instead. The port cannot be added as a member to a LAG group.
In this context, the lacp-tunnel command is supported for Epipe and VPLS services only.
The no form of this command disables LACP packet tunneling for the Ethernet port.
Default
no lacp-tunnel
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lacp-xmit-interval
lacp-xmit-interval
Syntax
lacp-xmit-interval {slow | fast}
no lacp-xmit-interval
Context
[Tree] (config>lag lacp-xmit-interval)
Full Context
configure lag lacp-xmit-interval
Description
This command specifies the interval signaled to the peer and tells the peer at which rate it should transmit.
Default
lacp-xmit-interval fast
Parameters
- slow
-
Transmits packets every 30 seconds.
- fast
-
Transmits packets every second.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lacp-xmit-stdby
lacp-xmit-stdby
Syntax
[no] lacp-xmit-stdby
Context
[Tree] (config>lag lacp-xmit-stdby)
Full Context
configure lag lacp-xmit-stdby
Description
This command enables LACP message transmission on standby links.
The no form of this command disables LACP message transmission. This command should be disabled for compatibility when using active/standby groups. This forces a timeout of the standby links by the peer. Use the no form if the peer does not implement the correct behavior regarding the lacp sync bit.
Default
lacp-xmit-stdby
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lag
lag
Syntax
lag lag-id lacp-key admin-key system-id system-id [remote-lag remote-lag-id] system-priority system-priority source-bmac-lsb use-lacp-key
lag lag-id lacp-key admin-key system-id system-id [remote-lag remote-lag-id] system-priority system-priority source-bmac-lsb MAC-Lsb
lag lag-id lacp-key admin-key system-id system-id [remote-lag remote-lag-id] system-priority system-priority
lag lag-id [remote-lag remote-lag-id]
no lag lag-id
Context
[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>mc-lag lag)
Full Context
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-lag lag
Description
This command defines a LAG which is forming a redundant-pair for MC-LAG with a LAG configured on the given peer. The same LAG group can be defined only in the scope of 1 peer. In order MC-LAG to become operational, all parameters (lacp-key, system-id, system-priority) must be configured the same on both nodes of the same redundant pair.
The partner system (the system connected to all links forming MC-LAG) will consider all ports using the same lacp-key, system-id, system-priority as the part of the same LAG. In order to achieve this in MC operation, both redundant-pair nodes have to be configured with the same values. In case of the mismatch, MC-LAG is kept in oper-down status.
Note that the correct CLI command to enable MC LAG for a LAG in standby-signaling power-off mode is lag lag-id [remote-lag remote-lag-id]. In the CLI help output, the first three forms are used to enable MC LAG for a LAG in LACP mode. MC LAG is disabled (regardless of the mode) for a given LAG with no lag lag-id.
Parameters
- lag-id
-
The LAG identifier, expressed as an integer. Specifying the lag-id allows the mismatch between lag-id on redundant-pair. If no lag-id is specified it is assumed that neighbor system uses the same lag-id as a part of the specific MC-LAG. If no matching MC-LAG group can be found between neighbor systems, the individual LAGs operates as usual (no MC-LAG operation is established).
- admin-key
-
Specifies a 16 bit key that needs to be configured in the same manner on both sides of the MC-LAG in order for the MC-LAG to come up.
- system-id
-
Specifies a 6 byte value expressed in the same notation as MAC address.
- remote-lag-id
-
Specifies the LAG ID on the remote system.
- system-priority
-
Specifies the system priority to be used in the context of the MC-LAG. The partner system will consider all ports using the same lacp-key, system-id, and system-priority as part of the same LAG.
- MAC-Lsb
-
Configures the last 16 bit of the MAC address to be used for all traffic ingressing the MC-LAG link(s) or if use-lacp-key option is used, it will only copy the value of lacp-key (redundancy multi-chassis mc-lag lag lacp-key admin-key). The command will fail if the value is the same with any of the following configured attributes:
-
Source-bmac-lsb assigned to other MC-LAG ports.
-
lsb 16 bits value for the source-bmac configured at chassis or BVPLS level
The first 32 bits will be copied from the source B-MAC of the BVPLS associated with the IVPLS for a specific IVPLS SAP mapped to the MC-LAG. The BVPLS source B-MAC can be provisioned for each BVPLS or can be inherited from the chassis PBB configuration.
-
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lag
Syntax
lag lag-id [name lag-name]
no lag lag-id
Context
[Tree] (config lag)
Full Context
configure lag
Description
Commands in this context configure Link Aggregation Group (LAG) attributes.
A LAG is used to group multiple ports into one logical link. The aggregation of multiple physical links allows for load sharing and offers seamless redundancy. If one link fails, traffic is redistributed over the remaining links.
For all ports in a LAG group, autonegotiation must be set to "limited” or "off”.
There are three possible settings for autonegotiation, as follows:
-
"on” or enabled with full port capabilities advertised
-
"off” or disabled where there is no autonegotiation advertisements
-
"limited” where a single speed/duplex is advertised.
When autonegotiation is enabled on a port, the link attempts to automatically negotiate the link speed and duplex parameters; the configured duplex and speed parameters are ignored.
When autonegotiation is disabled on a port, the port does not attempt to autonegotiate and will only operate at the speed and duplex settings configured for the port.
Disabling autonegotiation on gigabit ports is not allowed. This is in accordance with the IEEE 802.3 specification for gigabit Ethernet, which requires gigabyte to be enabled for far end fault indication.
If the config>port>ethernet autonegotiate limited keyword option is specified, the port will autonegotiate but only advertise the speed and duplex settings configured for the port. Use the limited mode on multi-speed gigabit ports to force gigabit operation while keeping autonegotiation is enabled for compliance with IEEE 801.3.
The system requires autonegotiation to be disabled or limited for ports in a LAG to guarantee a specific port speed.
The no form of this command deletes the LAG from the configuration. A LAG can only be deleted while the LAG is administratively shut down. Any dependencies, such as IP-Interface configurations, must be removed from the configuration before the no lag command is issued.
Parameters
- lag-id
-
Specifies the LAG identifier, expressed as an integer.
The LAG ID ranging from 1 to 64 supports up to 64 LAG members and LAG ID above 64 supports 32 LAG members.
- lag-name
-
Specifies an optional LAG name, up to 27 characters.
In model-driven interfaces, the LAG name is used for configuration references and show commands. A service provider or administrator can use the defined LAG name to identify and manage LAGs within the SR OS platforms.
In the classic CLI interface, the user must assign a LAG ID to create the LAG. The LAG name is optional and, if specified, must always start with "lag-”. If a name is not specified, SR OS automatically assigns a string version of the LAG ID as "lag-<lag-id>”.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lag
Syntax
lag [lag-id lag-id [port port-id]] [all]
lag [lag-id lag-id [port port-id]] [sm] [pkt] [cfg] [red] [iom-upd] [port-state] [timers] [sel-logic] [mc] [mc-pkt]
no lag [lag-id lag-id]
Context
[Tree] (debug lag)
Full Context
debug lag
Description
This command enables debugging for LAG.
Parameters
- lag-id
-
Specifies the link aggregation group ID.
- port-id
-
Specifies the physical port ID.
- all
-
Specifies to display all LAG information.
- sm
-
Specifies to display trace LACP state machine.
- pkt
-
Specifies to display trace LACP packets.
- cfg
-
Specifies to display trace LAG configuration.
- red
-
Specifies to display trace LAG high availability.
- iom-upd
-
Specifies to display trace LAG IOM updates.
- port-state
-
Specifies to display trace LAG port state transitions.
- timers
-
Specifies to display trace LAG timers.
- sel-logic
-
Specifies to display trace LACP selection logic.
- mc
-
Specifies to display multi-chassis parameters.
- mc-packet
-
Specifies to display the MC-LAG control packets with valid authentication were received on this system.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lag
Syntax
lag lag-id[:encap-val]
no lag
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nw-if lag)
Full Context
configure service vprn network-interface lag
Description
This command binds the interface to a Link Aggregation Group (LAG)
The no form of this command removes the LAG id from the configuration.
Parameters
- lag-id[:encap-val]
-
Specifies the LAG ID.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lag-port-down
lag-port-down
Syntax
[no] lag-port-down lag-id
Context
[Tree] (config>vrrp>policy>priority-event lag-port-down)
Full Context
configure vrrp policy priority-event lag-port-down
Description
This command creates the context to configure Link Aggregation Group (LAG) priority control events that monitor the operational state of the links in the LAG.
The lag-port-down command configures a priority control event. The event monitors the operational state of each port in the specified LAG. When one or more of the ports enter the operational down state, the event is considered to be set. When all the ports enter the operational up state, the event is considered to be clear. As ports enter the operational up state, any previous set threshold that represents more down ports is considered cleared, while the event is considered to be set.
Multiple unique lag-port-down event nodes can be configured within the priority-event node up to the maximum of 32 events.
The lag-port-down command can reference an arbitrary LAG. The lag-id does have to already exist within the system. The operational state of the lag-port-down event will indicate:
-
Set – non-existent
-
Set – one port down
-
Set – two ports down
-
Set – three ports down
-
Set – four ports down
-
Set – five ports down
-
Set – six ports down
-
Set – seven ports down
-
Set – eight ports down
-
Cleared – all ports up
When the lag-id is created, or a port in lag-id becomes operationally up or down, the event operational state must be updated appropriately.
When one or more of the LAG composite ports enters the operationally down state or the lag-id is deleted or does not exist, the event is considered to be set. When an event transitions from clear to set, the set is processed immediately and must be reflected in the associated virtual router instances in-use priority value. As the event transitions from clear to set, a hold-set timer is loaded with the value configured by the events hold-set command. This timer prevents the event from clearing until it expires, damping the effect of event flapping. If the event clears and becomes set again before the hold-set timer expires, the timer is reset to the hold-set value, extending the time before another clear can take effect.
The lag-port-down event is considered to have a tiered event set state. While the priority impact per number of ports down is totally configurable, as more ports go down, the effect on the associated virtual router instances in-use priority is expected to increase (lowering the priority). When each configured threshold is crossed, any higher thresholds are considered further event sets and are processed immediately with the hold-set timer reset to the configured value of the hold-set command. As the thresholds are crossed in the opposite direction (fewer ports down then previously), the priority effect of the event is not processed until the hold-set timer expires. If the number of ports down threshold again increases before the hold-set timer expires, the timer is only reset to the hold-set value if the number of ports down is equal to or greater than the threshold that set the timer.
The event contains number-down nodes that define the priority delta or explicit value to be used based on the number of LAG composite ports that are in the operationally down state. These nodes represent the event set thresholds. Not all port down thresholds must be configured. As the number of down ports increase, the number-down ports-down node that expresses a value equal to or less than the number of down ports describes the delta or explicit priority value to be applied.
The no form of the command deletes the specific LAG monitoring event. The event can be removed at anytime. When the event is removed, the in-use priority of all associated virtual router instances must be reevaluated. The events hold-set timer has no effect on the removal procedure.
Default
no lag-port-down — No LAG priority control events are created.
Parameters
- lag-id
-
The LAG ID that the specific event is to monitor expressed as a decimal integer. The lag-id can only be monitored by a single event in this policy. The LAG may be monitored by multiple VRRP priority control policies. A port within the LAG and the LAG ID itself are considered to be separate entities. A composite port may be monitored with the port-down event while the lag-id the port is in is monitored by a lag-port-down event in the same policy.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
last-member-query-interval
last-member-query-interval
Syntax
last-member-query-interval tenths-of-seconds
no last-member-query-interval
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping last-member-query-interval)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>mld-snooping last-member-query-interval)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping last-member-query-interval)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>mld-snooping last-member-query-interval)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mld-snooping last-member-query-interval)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>igmp-snooping last-member-query-interval)
Full Context
configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping last-member-query-interval
configure service vpls mesh-sdp mld-snooping last-member-query-interval
configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping last-member-query-interval
configure service vpls spoke-sdp mld-snooping last-member-query-interval
configure service vpls sap mld-snooping last-member-query-interval
configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping last-member-query-interval
Description
This command configures the maximum response time used in group-specific queries sent in response to 'leave' messages, and is also the amount of time between two consecutive group-specific queries. This value may be tuned to modify the leave latency of the network. A reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group.
The configured last-member-query-interval is ignored when fast leave is enabled on the SAP or SDP.
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
Default
last-member-query-interval 10
Parameters
- tenths-of-seconds
-
Specifies the frequency, in tenths of a second, at which query messages are sent.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
last-member-query-interval
Syntax
last-member-query-interval interval
no last-member-query-interval
Context
[Tree] (config>service>pw-template>igmp-snooping last-member-query-interval)
Full Context
configure service pw-template igmp-snooping last-member-query-interval
Description
This command configures the maximum response time used in group-specific queries sent in response to 'leave’ messages, and is also the amount of time between 2 consecutive group-specific queries. This value may be tuned to modify the leave latency of the network. A reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group.
The configured last-member-query-interval is ignored when fast-leave is enabled on the SAP or SDP.
Default
last-member-query-interval 10
Parameters
- interval
-
Specifies the frequency, in tenths of seconds, at which query messages are sent.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
latency-event
latency-event
Syntax
latency-event rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] [direction]
no latency-event
Context
[Tree] (config>saa>test latency-event)
Full Context
configure saa test latency-event
Description
Specifies that at the termination of an SAA test probe, the calculated latency event value is evaluated against the configured rising and falling latency event thresholds. SAA threshold events are generated as required.
Once the threshold (rising/falling) is crossed, it is disabled from generating additional events until the opposite threshold is crossed. If a falling-threshold is not supplied, the rising- threshold is re-enabled when it falls below the threshold after the initial crossing that generated the event.
The configuration of latency event thresholds is optional.
The no form of this command disables the latency event.
Parameters
- rising-threshold threshold
-
Specifies a rising threshold latency value, in milliseconds. When the test run is completed, the calculated latency value is compared to the configured latency rising threshold. If the test run latency value is greater than the configured rising threshold value then an SAA threshold event is generated. The SAA threshold event is tmnxOamSaaThreshold, logger application OAM, event #2101.
- falling-threshold threshold
-
Specifies a falling threshold latency value, in milliseconds. When the test run is completed, the calculated latency value is compared to the configured latency falling threshold. If the test run latency value is greater than the configured falling threshold value then an SAA threshold event is generated. The SAA threshold event is tmnxOamSaaThreshold, logger application OAM, event #2101.
- direction
-
Specifies the direction for OAM ping responses received for an OAM ping test run.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldap
ldap
Syntax
[no] ldap
Context
[Tree] (config>system>security ldap)
Full Context
configure system security ldap
Description
This command configures LDAP authentication parameters for the system.
The no form of this command de-configures the LDAP client from the SR OS.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldap-server
ldap-server
Syntax
ldap-server server-name
no ldap-server
Context
[Tree] (config>system>security>ldap>server ldap-server)
Full Context
configure system security ldap server ldap-server
Description
This command enables the LDAP server name or description.
The no form of this command disables the LDAP server name.
Parameters
- server-name
-
Specifies the name of the server, up to 32 characters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp
ldp
Syntax
[no] ldp
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp-evpn>mpls>auto-bind-tunnel>resolution-filter ldp)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn>mpls>auto-bind-tunnel>resolution-filter ldp)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp-ipvpn>mpls>auto-bind-tunnel>resolution-filter ldp)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>bgp-evpn>mpls>auto-bind-tunnel>resolution-filter ldp)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp-evpn mpls auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter ldp
configure service vpls bgp-evpn mpls auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter ldp
configure service vprn bgp-ipvpn mpls auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter ldp
configure service epipe bgp-evpn mpls auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter ldp
Description
This command enables LDP for the auto-bind tunnel resolution filter.
This command instructs BGP to search for an LDP LSP with a FEC prefix corresponding to the address of the BGP next hop.
The no form of this command removes the configuration.
Default
no ldp
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp
Syntax
[no] ldp
Context
[Tree] (config>router ldp)
Full Context
configure router ldp
Description
Commands in this context configure an LDP parameters.
To suspend the LDP protocol, use the shutdown command. Configuration parameters are not affected.
The no form of the command deletes the LDP protocol instance, removing all associated configuration parameters. The LDP instance must first be disabled with the shutdown command before being deleted.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp
Syntax
[no] ldp
Context
[Tree] (debug>router ldp)
Full Context
debug router ldp
Description
Use this command to configure LDP debugging.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp
Syntax
[no] ldp
Context
[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>indirect>tunnel-next-hop>resolution-filter ldp)
Full Context
configure router static-route-entry indirect tunnel-next-hop resolution-filter ldp
Description
This command enables the use of LDP-sourced tunnel entries in the TTM to resolve the associated static route next-hop.
The no form of this command disables the use of LDP-sourced tunnel entries to resolve static route next hops.
Default
no ldp
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp
Syntax
[no] ldp
Context
[Tree] (config>service>sdp ldp)
Full Context
configure service sdp ldp
Description
This command enables LDP-signaled LSPs on MPLS-encapsulated SDPs.
In MPLS SDP configurations either one or more LSP names can be specified or LDP can be enabled. The SDP ldp and lsp commands are mutually exclusive except if the mixed-lsp-mode option is also enabled. If an LSP is specified on an MPLS SDP, then LDP cannot be enabled on the SDP. To enable LDP on the SDP when an LSP is already specified, the LSP must be removed from the configuration using the no lsp lsp-name command or the mixed-lsp-mode option is also enabled.
Alternatively, if LDP is already enabled on an MPLS SDP, then an LSP cannot be specified on the SDP. To specify an LSP on the SDP, the LDP must be disabled. The LSP must have already been created in the config>router>mpls context with a valid far-end IP address. The above rules are relaxed when the mixed-lsp option is enabled on the SDP.
Default
no ldp (disabled)
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp
Syntax
[no] ldp
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>next-hop-resolution>shortcut-tunn>family>resolution-filter ldp)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>next-hop-resolution>labeled-routes>transport-tunnel>family>resolution-filter ldp)
Full Context
configure router bgp next-hop-resolution shortcut-tunnel family resolution-filter ldp
configure router bgp next-hop-resolution labeled-routes transport-tunnel family resolution-filter ldp
Description
This command enables LDP tunneling for next-hop resolution and specifies the LDP tunnels in the tunnel table corresponding to /32 IPv4 FECs and /128 IPv6 FECs.
The no form of this command disables LDP tunneling for next-hop resolution.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp
Syntax
ldp
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>auto-bind-tunnel>res-filter ldp)
Full Context
configure service vprn auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter ldp
Description
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp-over-rsvp
ldp-over-rsvp
Syntax
ldp-over-rsvp [include | exclude]
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp ldp-over-rsvp)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template ldp-over-rsvp)
Full Context
configure router mpls lsp ldp-over-rsvp
configure router mpls lsp-template ldp-over-rsvp
Description
This command configures an LSP so that it can be used by the IGP to calculate its SPF tree.
When the ldp-over-rsvp option is also enabled in ISIS or OSPF, the IGP provides LDP with all ECMP IP next-hops and tunnel endpoints that it considers to be the lowest cost path to its destination.
IGP provides only the endpoints which are the closest to the destination in terms of IGP cost for each IP next-hop of a prefix. If this results in more endpoints than the ECMP value configured on the router, it will further prune the endpoints based on the lowest router-id and for the same router-id, it will select lowest interface-index first.
LDP then looks up the tunnel table to select the actual tunnels to the endpoint provided by IGP and further limits the endpoint selection to the ones which are the closest to destination across all the IP next-hops provided by IGP for a prefix. For each remaining endpoint, LDP selects a tunnel in a round-robin fashion until the router ECMP value is reached. For each endpoint, only tunnels with the same lowest metric are candidates. If more than one tunnel qualifies, the selection begins with the lowest tunnel-id.
Default
ldp-over-rsvp include
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp-over-rsvp
Syntax
[no] ldp-over-rsvp
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis ldp-over-rsvp)
Full Context
configure router isis ldp-over-rsvp
Description
This command allows LDP over RSVP processing in IS-IS.
The no form of this command disables LDP over RSVP processing.
Default
no ldp-over-rsvp
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp-over-rsvp
Syntax
[no] ldp-over-rsvp
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ospf ldp-over-rsvp)
Full Context
configure router ospf ldp-over-rsvp
Description
This command allows LDP-over-RSVP processing in this OSPF instance.
Default
no ldp-over-rsvp
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp-shortcut
ldp-shortcut
Syntax
[no] ldp-shortcut
Context
[Tree] (config>router ldp-shortcut)
Full Context
configure router ldp-shortcut
Description
This command enables the resolution of IGP routes using LDP LSP across all network interfaces participating in the IS-IS and OSPF routing protocol in the system.
When LDP shortcut is enabled, LDP populates the routing table with next-hop entries corresponding to all prefixes for which it activated an LDP FEC. For a given prefix, two route entries are populated in the system routing table. One corresponds to the LDP shortcut next-hop and has an owner of LDP. The other one is the regular IP next-hop. The LDP shortcut next-hop always has preference over the regular IP next-hop for forwarding user packets and specified control packets over a given outgoing interface to the route next-hop.
All user and specified control packets for which the longest prefix match in RTM yields the FEC prefix will be forwarded over the LDP LSP.
When an IPv4 packet is received on an ingress network interface, a subscriber IES interface, or a regular IES interface, the lookup of the packet by the ingress forwarding engine will result in the packet being sent labeled with the label stack corresponding to the NHLFE of the LDP LSP when the preferred RTM entry corresponds to an LDP shortcut.
If the preferred RTM entry corresponds to an IP next-hop, the IPv4 packet is forwarded without a label.
When ECMP is enabled and multiple equal-cost next-hops exit for the IGP route, the ingress forwarding engine will spray the packets for this route based on hashing routine currently supported for IPv4 packets. When the preferred RTM entry corresponds to an LDP shortcut route, spraying will be performed across the multiple next-hops for the LDP FEC. The FEC next-hops can either be direct link LDP neighbors or T-LDP neighbors reachable over RSVP LSPs in the case of LDP-over-RSVP but not both.
When the preferred RTM entry corresponds to a regular IP route, spraying will be performed across regular IP next-hops for the prefix.
The no form of this command disables the resolution of IGP routes using LDP shortcuts.
Default
no ldp-shortcut
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp-sync
ldp-sync
Syntax
[no] ldp-sync
Context
[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>next-hop ldp-sync)
Full Context
configure router static-route-entry next-hop ldp-sync
Description
This command extends the LDP synchronization feature to a static route. When an interface comes back up, it is possible that a preferred static route using the interface as next-hop for a given prefix is enabled before the LDP adjacency to the peer LSR comes up on this interface. In this case, traffic on an SDP that uses the static route for the far-end address would be black-holed until the LDP session comes up and the FECs exchanged.
This option when enabled delays the activation of the static route until the LDP session comes up over the interface and the ldp-sync-timer configured on that interface has expired
Default
no ldp-sync
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldp-sync-timer
ldp-sync-timer
Syntax
ldp-sync-timer seconds [end-of-lib]
no ldp-sync-timer
Context
[Tree] (config>router>if ldp-sync-timer)
Full Context
configure router interface ldp-sync-timer
Description
This command enables synchronization of an IGP and LDP. When a link is restored after a failure, the IGP sets the link cost to infinity and advertises it. The actual value advertised in OSPF is 0xFFFF (65535). The actual value advertised in IS-IS regular metric is 0x3F (63) and in IS-IS wide-metric is 0xFFFFFE (16777214). This feature is not supported on RIP interfaces.
If an interface belongs to both IS-IS and OSPF, a physical failure will cause both IGPs to advertise an infinite metric and to follow the IGP-LDP synchronization procedures. If only one IGP bounces on this interface or on the system, then only the affected IGP advertises the infinite metric and follows the IGP-LDP synchronization procedures.
Next, an LDP Hello adjacency is brought up with the neighbor. The LDP synchronization timer is started by the IGP when the LDP session to the neighbor is up over the interface. This is to allow time for the label-FEC bindings to be exchanged.
When the LDP synchronization timer expires, the link cost is restored and is readvertised. The IGP will announce a new best next hop and LDP will use it if the label binding for the neighbor’s FEC is available.
If the user changes the cost of an interface, the new value is advertised at the next flooding of link attributes by the IGP. However, if the LDP synchronization timer is still running, the new cost value will only be advertised after the timer expires. The new cost value will also be advertised after the user executes any of the following commands:
-
tools>perform>router>isis>ldp-sync-exit
-
tools>perform>router>ospf>ldp-sync-exit
-
config>router>if>no ldp-sync-timer
-
config>router>ospf>disable-ldp-sync
-
router>isis>disable-ldp-sync
If the user changes the value of the LDP synchronization timer parameter, the new value will take effect at the next synchronization event. If the timer is still running, it will continue to use the previous value.
If parallel links exist to the same neighbor, then the bindings and services should remain up as long as there is one interface that is up. However, the user-configured LDP synchronization timer still applies on the interface that failed and was restored. In this case, the router will only consider this interface for forwarding after the IGP re-advertises its actual cost value.
The LDP Sync Timer State is not always synchronized across to the standby CPM. Therefore, after an activity switch, the timer state might not be same as it was on the previously active CPM.
If the end-of-lib option is configured, then the system will start the LDP synchronization timer as usual. If the LDP End of LIB Typed Wildcard FEC messages are received for every FEC type negotiated for a given session to an LDP peer for that IGP interface, the ldp-sync-timer is terminated early and the IGP link cost is restored. If the ldp-sync-timer expires before the LDP End of LIB messages are received for every negotiated FEC type, then the system will restore the IGP link cost. The end-of-lib option is disabled by default.
The no form of this command disables IGP-LDP synchronization and deletes the configuration.
Default
no ldp-sync-timer
Parameters
- seconds
-
Specifies the time interval for the IGP-LDP synchronization timer.
- end-of-lib
-
Specifies that the system should terminate the ldp-sync-timer early if the LDP End of LIB Typed Wildcard FEC messages are received for every FEC type negotiated for a given session to an LDP peer for that IGP interface.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ldra
ldra
Syntax
ldra
no ldra
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>dhcp6 ldra)
Full Context
configure service vpls sap dhcp6 ldra
Description
This command enables LDRA.
The no form of this command disables LDRA.
Default
no ldra
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
leak
leak
Syntax
leak [ip-address]
no leak
Context
[Tree] (debug>router>isis leak)
Full Context
debug router isis leak
Description
This command enables debugging for IS-IS leaks.
The no form of the command disables debugging.
Parameters
- ip-address
-
When specified, only the specified address is debugged for IS-IS leaks.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
leak
Syntax
leak [ip-address]
no leak
Context
[Tree] (debug>router>ospf3 leak)
[Tree] (debug>router>ospf leak)
Full Context
debug router ospf3 leak
debug router ospf leak
Description
This command enables debugging for OSPF leaks.
Parameters
- ip-address
-
Specifies the IPv4 or IPv6 address to debug OSPF leaks.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
leak-destination
leak-destination
Syntax
leak-destination
Context
[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry leak-destination)
Full Context
configure router static-route-entry leak-destination
Description
Commands in this context configure a list of VPRNs that receive a leaked copy of the static route.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
leak-export
leak-export
Syntax
leak-export plcy-or-long-expr [plcy-or-expr [plcy-or-expr]]
no leak-export
Context
[Tree] (config>router leak-export)
Full Context
configure router leak-export
Description
This command associates up to four policies to control the leaking of GRT routes into the associated VPRN.
If a route is evaluated and the action is accepted, that route is subject leaking into an associated VPRN instance, assuming the route is fully resolved and active.
This process creates the pool of routes that can be leaked. Within each VPRN, a corresponding import-grt policy must be configured to import select routes into that specific VPRN instance.
The no form of this command removes all route leaking policy associations and effectively disables the leaking of GRT routes into associated VPRNs.
Parameters
- plcy-or-long-expr
-
Specifies the route policy name, up to 64 characters or a policy logical expression, up to 255 characters.
- plcy-or-expr
-
Specifies the route policy name, up to 64 characters or a policy logical expression, up to 64 characters long. A maximum of four policy names or policy logical expressions can be specified in a single statement.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
leak-export-limit
leak-export-limit
Syntax
[no] leak-export-limit [value]
Context
[Tree] (config>router leak-export-limit)
Full Context
configure router leak-export-limit
Description
This command sets a maximum limit on the number of GRT routes that can be leaked into VPRN instances.
The no form of this command resets the leak-export-limit to its default value of 5.
Default
leak-export-limit 5
Parameters
- value
-
Specifies the maximum number of eligible GRT routes that can be leaked into VPRN instances.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
leak-import
leak-import
Syntax
leak-import plcy-or-long-expr [plcy-or-expr]
no leak-import
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>rib-management>ipv4 leak-import)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>rib-management>label-ipv6 leak-import)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>rib-management>label-ipv4 leak-import)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>rib-management>ipv6 leak-import)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp rib-management ipv4 leak-import
configure service vprn bgp rib-management label-ipv6 leak-import
configure service vprn bgp rib-management label-ipv4 leak-import
configure service vprn bgp rib-management ipv6 leak-import
Description
This command configures route policies that control the importation of leak-eligible routes from the BGP RIB of another routing instance into the unlabeled-IPv4, unlabeled-IPv6, labeled-IPv4, or labeled-IPv6 RIB of the VPRN instance. To leak a route from one routing instance to another, the origin and destination RIB types must be the same; for example, it is not possible to leak a route from an unlabeled-IPv4 RIB of a VPRN into the labeled-IPv4 RIB of the base router.
The leak-import command can reference up to 15 objects, where each object is either a policy logical expression or the name of a single policy. The objects are evaluated in the specified order to determine the final action to accept or reject the route.
Only one of the 15 objects referenced by the leak-import command can be a policy logical expression consisting of policy names (enclosed in square brackets) and logical operators (AND, OR, NOT). The first of the 15 objects has a maximum length of 255 characters while the remaining 14 objects have a maximum length of 64 characters each.
When a leak-import policy is not specified, no BGP routes from other routing instances are leaked into the VPRN BGP RIB.
The no form of this command removes the policy association.
Default
no leak-import
Parameters
- plcy-or-long-expr
-
Specifies the route policy name (up to 64 characters) or a policy logical expression (up to 255 characters). Allowed values are any string of characters composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, ?, space), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
- plcy-or-expr
-
Specifies the route policy name (up to 64 characters) or a policy logical expression (up to 255 characters). Allowed values are any string of characters composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, ?, space), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
leak-import
Syntax
leak-import plcy-or-long-expr [plcy-or-expr]
no leak-import
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>rib-management>ipv6 leak-import)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>rib-management>label-ipv4 leak-import)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>rib-management>ipv4 leak-import)
Full Context
configure router bgp rib-management ipv6 leak-import
configure router bgp rib-management label-ipv4 leak-import
configure router bgp rib-management ipv4 leak-import
Description
This command configures the router to specify route policies that control the importation of leak-eligible routes from the BGP RIB of another routing instance into the unlabeled-IPv4, unlabeled-IPv6, or labeled-IPv4 RIB of the base router. To leak a route from one routing instance to another, the origin and destination RIB types must be the same; for example, it is not possible to leak a route from an unlabeled-IPv4 RIB of a VPRN into the labeled-IPv4 RIB of the base router.
The leak-import command can reference up to 15 objects, where each object is either a policy logical expression or the name of a single policy. The objects are evaluated in the specified order to determine final action to accept or reject the route.
Only one of the 15 objects referenced by the leak-import command can be a policy logical expression consisting of policy names (enclosed in square brackets) and logical operators (AND, OR, NOT). The first of the 15 objects has a maximum length of 255 characters while the remaining 14 objects have a maximum length of 64 characters each.
When a leak-import policy is not specified, no BGP routes from other routing instances are leaked into the base router BGP RIB.
The no form of this command removes the policy association.
Default
no leak-import
Parameters
- plcy-or-long-expr
-
Specifies up to 14 route policy names (up to 64 characters long) or a policy logical expression (up to 255 characters long). Allowed values are any string of characters composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, ?, space), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
- plcy-or-expr
-
The route policy name (up to 64 characters long) or a policy logical expression (up to 64 characters long). Allowed values are any string of characters composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, ?, space), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
learn-dynamic
learn-dynamic
Syntax
[no] learn-dynamic
Context
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>vpls>evpn>arp learn-dynamic)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>vpls>evpn>nd learn-dynamic)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>vpls>evpn>nd learn-dynamic)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>vpls>evpn>arp learn-dynamic)
Full Context
configure service ies interface vpls evpn arp learn-dynamic
configure service ies interface vpls evpn nd learn-dynamic
configure service vprn interface vpls evpn nd learn-dynamic
configure service vprn interface vpls evpn arp learn-dynamic
Description
This command controls whether the ARP or ND frames received on EVPN binds are used to learn dynamic ARP and ND entries in the ARP/ND table.
The no form of the command reverts to the default.
Default
learn-dynamic
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lease-hold-time
lease-hold-time
Syntax
lease-hold-time [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]
no lease-hold-time
Context
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server lease-hold-time)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp6>server lease-hold-time)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server lease-hold-time)
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp6>server lease-hold-time)
Full Context
configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server lease-hold-time
configure service vprn dhcp6 local-dhcp-server lease-hold-time
configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server lease-hold-time
configure router dhcp6 local-dhcp-server lease-hold-time
Description
This command configures the time to remember this lease and is applicable for unsolicited release conditions such as lease timeout if the lease-hold-time-for command is set to the default value no solicited-release and is additionally applicable for normal solicited releases from DHCP clients if the lease-hold-time-for command is set to solicited-release.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Default
lease-hold-time sec 0
Parameters
- lease-hold-time
-
Specifies the amount of time to remember the lease.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lease-hold-time-for
lease-hold-time-for
Syntax
[no] lease-hold-time-for
Context
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp6>server lease-hold-time-for)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp6>server lease-hold-time-for)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server lease-hold-time-for)
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server lease-hold-time-for)
Full Context
configure router dhcp6 local-dhcp-server lease-hold-time-for
configure service vprn dhcp6 local-dhcp-server lease-hold-time-for
configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server lease-hold-time-for
configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server lease-hold-time-for
Description
Commands in this context configure lease-hold-time-for parameters which define additional types of lease or triggers that cause system to hold up leases.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lease-populate
lease-populate
Syntax
lease-populate [nbr-of-leases]
lease-populate [nbr-of-leases] l2-header [mac ieee-address]
no lease-populate
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>dhcp lease-populate)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>dhcp lease-populate)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>dhcp lease-populate)
Full Context
configure service vprn interface dhcp lease-populate
configure service vpls sap dhcp lease-populate
configure service ies interface dhcp lease-populate
Description
Commands in this context configure IPoE host parameters.
For VPLS, DHCP snooping must be explicitly enabled (using the snoop command) at all points where DHCP messages requiring snooping enter the VPLS instance (both from the DHCP server and from the subscribers). Lease state information is extracted from snooped DHCP ACK messages to populate lease state table entries for the SAP.
The optional nbr-of-leases parameter defines the number lease state table entries allowed.
-
for this SAP in case of a VPLS service
-
for this interface in case of an IES or VPRN interface
-
for each SAP in case of an IES or VPRN group-interface
-
for this interface in case of an IES or VPRN retail subscriber-interface
If the nbr-of-leases parameter is omitted, only a single entry is allowed. Once the maximum number of entries has been reached, subsequent lease state entries are not allowed and subsequent DHCP ACK messages are discarded.
The retained lease state information representing dynamic hosts may be used to:
-
Populate a SAP based anti-spoof filter table to provide dynamic anti-spoof filtering. If the system is unable to populate the dynamic host information in the anti-spoof filter table on the SAP, the DHCP ACK message must be discarded without adding new lease state entry or updating an existing lease state entry.
-
Populate the system’s ARP cache based on the arp-populate configuration. Applicable to IES and VPRN interfaces or group-interfaces.
-
Populate managed entries into a VPLS forwarding database. VPLS forwarding database population is an implicit feature that automatically places the dynamic host’s MAC address into the VPLS FDB. When a dynamic host’s MAC address is placed in the lease state table, it will automatically be populated into the VPLS forwarding database associated with the SAP on which the host is learned. The dynamic host MAC address will override any static MAC entries using the same MAC and prevent dynamic learning of the MAC on another interface. Existing static MAC entries with the same MAC address as the dynamic host are marked as inactive but not deleted. If all entries in the lease state table associated with the MAC address are removed, the static MAC may be populated. New static MAC definitions for the VPLS instance may be created while a dynamic host exists associated with the static MAC address.
-
Generate dynamic ARP replies if arp-reply-agent is enabled. Applicable to VPLS service SAPs
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Parameters
- nbr-of-leases
-
Specifies the number of DHCPv4 leases allowed.
- l2-header
-
Indicates a mode of operation where anti-spoof entry associated with the given DHCP state is created based on the src-mac address from the Layer 2 header of the DHCP request message. The Layer 2 header flag is not set by default. This parameter is only applicable for group interfaces.
- mac
-
Specifies that the provisioned ieee-address is used in the anti-spoofing entries for this SAP. The parameter may be changed mid-session. Existing sessions will not be re-programmed unless a tools>perform>subscriber-mgmt>remap-lease-state command is issued for the lease. This parameter is only applicable for group interfaces.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lease-populate
Syntax
lease-populate [nbr-of-leases]
lease-populate [nbr-of-leases] route-populate [pd] na [ta]
lease-populate [nbr-of-leases] route-populate pd [na] [ta] [exclude]
lease-populate [nbr-of-leases] route-populate [pd] [na] ta
no lease-populate
Context
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>dhcp6-relay lease-populate)
Full Context
configure service ies interface ipv6 dhcp6-relay lease-populate
Description
This command specifies the maximum number of DHCPv6 lease states allocated by the DHCPv6 relay function, allowed on this interface.
Optionally, by specifying route-populate parameter, system could:
-
Create routes based on the IA_PD/IA_NA/IA_TA prefix option in relay-reply message.
-
Create black hole routes based on OPTION_PD_EXCLUDE in IA_PD in relay-reply message.
These routes could be redistributed into IGP/BGP by using route-policy, following protocol types that could be used in "from protocol”:
-
dhcpv6-pd
-
dhcpv6-na
-
dhcpv6-ta
-
dhcpv6-pd-excl
Parameters
- nbr-of-leases
-
Defines the number lease state table entries allowed for this interface. If this parameter is omitted, only a single entry is allowed. Once the maximum number of entries has been reached, subsequent lease state entries are not allowed and subsequent DHCPv6 REPLY messages are discarded.
- route-populate
-
Specifies the route populate parameter.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lease-populate
Syntax
lease-populate [nbr-of-leases]
lease-populate [nbr-of-leases] route-populate [pd] na [ta]
lease-populate [nbr-of-leases] route-populate pd [na] [ta] [exclude]
lease-populate [nbr-of-leases] route-populate [pd] [na] ta
no lease-populate
Context
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>dhcp6-relay lease-populate)
Full Context
configure service ies interface ipv6 dhcp6-relay lease-populate
Description
This command specifies the maximum number of DHCPv6 lease states allocated by the DHCPv6 relay function, allowed on this interface.
Optionally, by specifying "route-populate” parameter, system could:
-
Create routes based on the IA_PD/IA_NA/IA_TA prefix option in relay-reply message.
-
Create black hole routes based on OPTION_PD_EXCLUDE in IA_PD in relay-reply message.
These routes could be redistributed into IGP/BGP by using route-policy, following protocol types that could be used in "from protocol”:
-
dhcpv6-pd
-
dhcpv6-na
-
dhcpv6-ta
-
dhcpv6-pd-excl
Parameters
- nbr-of-entries
-
Defines the number lease state table entries allowed for this interface. If this parameter is omitted, only a single entry is allowed. Once the maximum number of entries has been reached, subsequent lease state entries are not allowed and subsequent DHCPv6 ACK messages are discarded.
- route-populate
-
Specifies the route populate parameter.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lease-rebind-time
lease-rebind-time
Syntax
lease-rebind-time [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]
no lease-rebind-time
Context
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host>options lease-rebind-time)
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool>options lease-rebind-time)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool>options lease-rebind-time)
Full Context
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host options lease-rebind-time
configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool options lease-rebind-time
configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server pool options lease-rebind-time
Description
This command configures the time the client transitions to a rebinding state for a DHCP client.
The no form of this command removes the time from the configuration.
Parameters
- lease-rebind-time
-
Specifies the lease rebind time.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lease-renew-time
lease-renew-time
Syntax
lease-renew-time [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]
no lease-renew-time
Context
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host>options lease-renew-time)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool>options lease-renew-time)
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool>options lease-renew-time)
Full Context
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host options lease-renew-time
configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server pool options lease-renew-time
configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool options lease-renew-time
Description
This command configures the time the client transitions to a renew state for a DHCP client.
The no form of this command removes the time from the configuration.
Parameters
- lease-renew-time
-
Specifies the lease renew time.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lease-time
lease-time
Syntax
lease-time [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]
no lease-time
Context
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool>options lease-time)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool>options lease-time)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host>options lease-time)
Full Context
configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool options lease-time
configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server pool options lease-time
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host options lease-time
Description
This command configures the amount of time that the DHCP server grants to the DHCP client permission to use a specific IP address.
The no form of this command removes the lease time parameters from the configuration.
Parameters
- days
-
Specifies the number of days that the given IP address is valid.
- hours
-
Specifies the number of hours that the given IP address is valid.
- minutes
-
Specifies the number of minutes that the given IP address is valid.
- seconds
-
Specifies the number of seconds that the given IP address is valid.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lease-time
Syntax
lease-time [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds] [override]
no lease-time
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>dhcp>proxy lease-time)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>dhcp>proxy-server lease-time)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>dhcp>proxy-server lease-time)
Full Context
configure service vprn interface dhcp proxy-server lease-time
configure service vpls sap dhcp proxy-server lease-time
configure service ies interface dhcp proxy-server lease-time
Description
This command defines the length of lease-time that is provided to DHCP clients. By default, the local-proxy-server always makes use of the lease time information provide by either a RADIUS or DHCP server.
The no form of this command disables the use of the lease-time command. The local-proxy-server will use the lease-time offered by either a RADIUS or DHCP server.
Default
lease-time days 7
Parameters
- override
-
Specifies that the local-proxy-server will use the configured lease-time information to provide DHCP clients
- days
-
Specifies the number of days that the given IP address is valid.
- hours
-
Specifies the number of hours that the given IP address is valid.
- minutes
-
Specifies the number of minutes that the given IP address is valid.
- seconds
-
Specifies the number of seconds that the given IP address is valid.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
least-fill
least-fill
Syntax
[no] least-fill
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template least-fill)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp least-fill)
Full Context
configure router mpls lsp-template least-fill
configure router mpls lsp least-fill
Description
This command enables the use of the least-fill path selection method for the computation of the path of this LSP.
When MPLS requests the computation of a path for this LSP, CSPF will find all equal cost shortest paths which satisfy the constraints of this path. Then, CSPF identifies the single link in each of these paths which has the least available bandwidth as a percentage of its maximum reservable bandwidth. It then selects the path which has the largest value of this percentage least available bandwidth figure. CSPF identifies the least available bandwidth link in each equal cost path after it has accounted for the bandwidth of the new requested path of this LSP.
CSPF applies the least-fill path selection method to all requests for a path, primary and secondary, of an LSP for which this option is enabled. The bandwidth of the path can be any value, including zero.
CSPF applies the least-fill criterion separately to each preemption priority in the base TE. A higher setup priority path can preemptively lower holding priority paths.
CSPF also applies the least-fill criterion separately to each Diff-Serv TE class if Diff-Serv TE is enabled on this node. A higher setup priority path can preemptively lower holding priority paths within a Class Type.
MPLS will re-signal and move the LSP to the new path in the following cases:
-
Initial LSP path signaling.
-
Re-try of an LSP path after failure.
-
Make-before-break (MBB) due to pending soft preemption of the LSP path.
-
MBB due to LSP path configuration change, that is, a user change to bandwidth parameter of primary or secondary path, or a user enabling of fast-reroute option for the LSP.
-
MBB of secondary path due to an update to primary path SRLG.
-
MBB due to FRR Global Revertive procedures on the primary path.
-
Manual re-signaling of an LSP path or of all LSP paths by the user.
During a manual re-signaling of an LSP path, MPLS will always re-signal the path regardless of whether the new path is exactly the same or different than the current path and regardless of whether the metric of the new path is different or not from that of the current path.
During a timer-based re-signaling of an LSP path which has the least-fill option enabled, MPLS will only re-signal the path if the metric of the new path is different than the one of the current path.
The no form of this command deletes a specific node entry in this database.
Default
no least-fill. The path of an LSP is randomly chosen among a set of equal cost paths.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
least-fill-min-thd
least-fill-min-thd
Syntax
least-fill-min-thd percent
no least-fill-min-thd
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls least-fill-min-thd)
Full Context
configure router mpls least-fill-min-thd
Description
This parameter is used in the least-fill path selection process. When comparing the percentage of least available link bandwidth across the sorted paths, whenever two percentages differ by less than the value configured as the least-fill-min-thresh, CSPF will consider them equal and will apply a random number generator to select the path among these paths
The no form of this command resets this parameter to its default value.
Default
least-fill-min-thd 5
Parameters
- percentage
-
Specifies the least fill minimum threshold value as a percentage.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
least-fill-reoptim-thd
least-fill-reoptim-thd
Syntax
least-fill-reoptim-thd percent
no least-fill-reoptim-thd
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls least-fill-reoptim-thd)
Full Context
configure router mpls least-fill-reoptim-thd
Description
This parameter is used in the least-fill path selection method. During a timer-based re-signaling of an LSP path which has the least-fill option enabled, CSPF will first update the least-available bandwidth figure for the current path of this LSP. It then applies the least-fill path selection method to select a new path for this LSP. If the new computed path has the same cost as the current path, it will compare the least-available bandwidth figures of the two paths and if the difference exceeds the user configured optimization threshold, MPLS will generate a trap to indicate that a better least-fill path is available for this LSP. This trap can be used by an external SNMP based device to trigger a manual re-signaling of the LSP path since the timer-based re-signaling will not re-signal the path in this case. MPLS will generate a path update trap at the first MBB event which results in the re-signaling of the LSP path. This should clear the eligibility status of the path at the SNMP device.
The no form of this command resets this parameter to its default value.
Default
least-fill-reoptim-thd 10
Parameters
- percentage
-
Specifies the least fill reoptimization threshold value as a percentage.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
legacy
legacy
Syntax
[no] legacy
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis>te>application-link-attributes legacy)
Full Context
configure router isis traffic-engineering-options application-link-attributes legacy
Description
This command enables legacy mode of advertising TE attributes.
The no form of this command disables legacy mode, but enables the per-application TE attribute advertisement for RSVP-TE.
Default
legacy
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
legacy-ipv4-lsr-interop
legacy-ipv4-lsr-interop
Syntax
[no] legacy-ipv4-lsr-interop
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ldp legacy-ipv4-lsr-interop)
Full Context
configure router ldp legacy-ipv4-lsr-interop
Description
This command provides for a global LDP knob to allow interoperability with legacy IPv4 LSR implementations which do not comply with the processing of Hello TLVs with the U-bit set. Specifically, this feature disables the following Hello TLVs:
-
The Nokia proprietary Interface Info TLV (0x3E05) in the Hello message sent to the peer. This also results in the non-generation of the Nokia proprietary Hello Adjacency Status TLV (0x3E06) since the Interface Info TLV is not sent.
This is performed in SR OS releases 12 and higher.
-
The RFC 7552 standard dual-stack capability TLV (0x701) and the Nokia proprietary Adjacency capability TLV (0x3E07) in SR OS releases 13 and higher.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
legacy-mode
legacy-mode
Syntax
[no] legacy-mode
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>error-handling legacy-mode)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>error-handling legacy-mode)
Full Context
configure router bgp error-handling legacy-mode
configure service vprn bgp error-handling legacy-mode
Description
The no form of this command configures the BGP instance to ignore the configured update-fault-tolerance commands and apply the new error-handling procedures described in RFC 7606 on all sessions.
Default
no legacy-mode
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
length
length
Syntax
length lines
Context
[Tree] (environment>terminal length)
Full Context
environment terminal length
Description
This command sets the number of lines on a screen.
Parameters
- lines
-
Specifies the number of lines for the terminal screen length, expressed as a decimal integer.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
length
Syntax
length lines
Context
[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>cli>md-cli>environment>console length)
Full Context
configure system management-interface cli md-cli environment console length
Description
This command configures the set number of lines displayed on the console.
Default
length 24
Parameters
- lines
-
Specifies the number of lines displayed in the console window.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
length-field
length-field
Syntax
[no] length-field
Context
[Tree] (config>test-oam>icmp>ipv6 length-field)
Full Context
configure test-oam icmp ipv6 length-field
Description
This command enables the setting of the length field when building an RFC 4884, Extended ICMP to Support Multi-Part Messages, ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable message or ICMPv6 Time Exceeded message.
The no form of this command disables the length field modification.
Default
no length-field
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
ler-use-dscp
ler-use-dscp
Syntax
[no] ler-use-dscp
Context
[Tree] (config>qos>network>ingress ler-use-dscp)
Full Context
configure qos network ingress ler-use-dscp
Description
This command is used to enable tunnel QoS mapping on all ingress network IP interfaces that the network-qos-policy-id is associated with. The command may be defined at any time after the network QoS policy has been created. Any network IP interfaces currently associated with the policy will immediately start to use the internal IP ToS field of any tunnel terminated IP routed packet received on the interface, ignoring any QoS markings in the tunnel portion of the packet.
This attribute provides the ability to ignore the network ingress QoS mapping of a terminated tunnel containing an IP packet that is to be routed to a base router or VPRN destination. This is advantageous when the mapping for the tunnel QoS marking does not accurately or completely reflect the required QoS handling for the IP routed packet. When the mechanism is enabled on an ingress network IP interface, the IP interface will ignore the tunnel’s QoS mapping and derive the internal forwarding class and profile based on the precedence or DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) values within the routed IP header ToS field compared to the Network QoS policy defined on the IP interface.
The default state is not to enforce tunnel termination IP routed QoS override within the network QoS policy.
The no form of this command removes tunnel termination IP routed QoS override from the network QoS policy and all ingress network IP interfaces associated with the policy.
Default
no ler-use-dscp
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
less-specific
less-specific
Syntax
less-specific [allow-default]
no less-specific
Context
[Tree] (config>vrrp>policy>priority-event>route-unknown less-specific)
Full Context
configure vrrp policy priority-event route-unknown less-specific
Description
This command allows a CIDR shortest match hit on a route prefix that contains the IP route prefix associated with the route unknown priority event.
The less-specific command modifies the search parameters for the IP route prefix specified in the route-unknown priority event. Specifying less-specific allows a CIDR shortest match hit on a route prefix that contains the IP route prefix.
The less-specific command eases the RTM lookup criteria when searching for the prefix/mask-length. When the route-unknown priority event sends the prefix to the RTM (as if it was a destination lookup), the result route table prefix (if a result is found) is checked to see if it is an exact match or a less specific match. The less-specific command enables a less specific route table prefix to match the configured prefix. When less-specific is not specified, a less specific route table prefix fails to match the configured prefix. The allow-default optional parameter extends the less-specific match to include the default route (0.0.0.0).
The no form of the command prevents RTM lookup results that are less specific than the route prefix from matching.
Default
no less-specific — The route unknown priority events requires an exact prefix/mask match.
Parameters
- allow-default
-
When the allow-default parameter is specified with the less-specific command, an RTM return of 0.0.0.0 matches the IP prefix. If less-specific is entered without the allow-default parameter, a return of 0.0.0.0 will not match the IP prefix. To disable allow-default, but continue to allow less-specific match operation, only enter the less-specific command (without the allow-default parameter).
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
level
level
Syntax
level priority-level rate pir-rate [cir cir-rate]
level priority-level percent-rate pir-percent [percent-cir cir-percent]
no level priority-level
Context
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>egr-scheduler-override level)
Full Context
configure port ethernet egress-scheduler-override level
Description
This command overrides the maximum and CIR rate parameters for a specific priority level on the port or channel’s port scheduler instance. When the level command is executed for a priority level, the corresponding priority level command in the port-scheduler-policy associated with the port is ignored.
The override level command supports the keyword max for the rate and cir parameter. When executing the level override command, at least the rate or cir keywords and associated parameters must be specified for the command to succeed.
The no form of this command removes the local port priority level rate overrides. Once removed, the port priority level will use the port scheduler policies level command for that priority level.
Parameters
- priority-level
-
Identifies which of the eight port priority levels are being overridden.
- pir-rate
-
Overrides the port scheduler policy’s maximum level rate and requires either the max keyword or a rate defined in kilobits per second to follow.
- cir-rate
-
Overrides the port scheduler policy’s within-cir level rate and requires either the max keyword or a rate defined in kilobits per second to follow.
- pir-percent
-
Specifies the PIR as a percentage.
- cir-percent
-
Specifies the CIR as a percentage.
- max
-
removes any existing rate limit imposed by the port scheduler policy for the priority level allowing it to use as much total bandwidth as possible.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
level
Syntax
level level-number
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>if level)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>link-group level)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis level)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis interface level
configure service vprn isis link-group level
configure service vprn isis level
Description
This command creates the context to configure IS-IS Level 1 or Level 2 area attributes.
A router can be configured as a Level 1, Level 2, or Level 1/2 system. A Level 1 adjacency can be established if there is at least one area address shared by this router and a neighbor. A Level 2 adjacency cannot be established over this interface.
Level 1/2 adjacency is created if the neighbor is also configured as Level 1/2 router and has at least one area address in common. A Level 2 adjacency is established if there are no common area IDs.
A Level 2 adjacency is established if another router is configured as Level 2 or a Level 1/2 router with interfaces configured as Level 1/2 or Level 2. Level 1 adjacencies are not established over this interface.
To reset global and/or interface level parameters to the default, the following commands must be entered independently:
-
level>no hello-authentication-key
-
level>no hello-authentication-type
-
level>no hello-interval
-
level>no hello-multiplier
-
level>no metric
-
level>no passive
-
level>no priority
Default
level 1 or level 2
Parameters
- level-number
-
The IS-IS level number.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
level
Syntax
level syslog-level
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>log>syslog level)
Full Context
configure service vprn log syslog level
Description
This command configures the syslog message severity level threshold. All messages with severity level equal to or higher than the threshold are sent to the syslog target host.
Only a single threshold level can be specified. If multiple levels are entered, the last level entered will overwrite the previously entered commands.
Default
level info
Parameters
- syslog-level
-
The threshold severity level name.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
level
Syntax
level priority-level rate pir-rate [cir cir-rate] group name [weight weight] [monitor-threshold percent]
level priority-level percent-rate pir-percent [percent-cir cir-percent] group name [weight weight] [monitor-threshold percent]
level priority-level rate pir-rate [cir cir-rate] [monitor-threshold percent]
level priority-level percent-rate pir-percent [percent-cir cir-percent] [monitor-threshold percent]
no level priority-level
Context
[Tree] (config>qos>port-scheduler-policy level)
Full Context
configure qos port-scheduler-policy level
Description
This command configures an explicit within-CIR bandwidth limit and a total bandwidth limit for each port scheduler’s priority level. To understand how to set the level rate and CIR parameters, a basic understanding of the port-level scheduler bandwidth allocation mechanism is required. The port scheduler takes all available bandwidth for the port or channel (after the max-rate and any port egress-rate limits have been accounted for) and offers it to each of the eight priority levels twice.
The first pass is called the within-CIR pass and consists of providing the available port bandwidth to each of the 8 priority levels, starting with level 8 and moving down to level 1. Each level takes the offered load and distributes it to all child members that have a port-parent cir-level equal to the current priority level. (Any child with a cir-weight equal to 0 is skipped in this pass.) Each child may consume bandwidth up to the child’s frame-based within-CIR offered load. The remaining available port bandwidth is then offered to the next lower priority level until level 1 is reached.
The second pass is called the above-CIR pass and consists of providing the remaining available port bandwidth to each of the eight priority levels a second time. Again, each level takes the offered load and distributes it to all child members that have a port-parent level equal to the current priority level. Each child may consume bandwidth up to the remainder of the child’s frame-based offered load (some of the offered load may have been serviced during the within-CIR pass). The remaining available port bandwidth is then offered to the next priority level until level 1 is again reached.
If the port scheduling policy is using the default orphan behavior (orphan-override has not been configured on the policy), the system then takes any remaining port bandwidth and allocates it to the orphan queues and scheduler on priority level 1. In a non-override orphan state, all orphans are attached to priority level 1 using a weight of 0. The zero weight value causes the system to allocate bandwidth equally to all orphans based on each orphan queue or scheduler’s ability to use the bandwidth. If the policy has an orphan-override configured, the orphans are handled based on the override commands parameters in a similar fashion to properly parented queues and schedulers.
The port scheduler priority level command rate keyword is used to optionally limit the total amount of bandwidth that is allocated to a priority level (total for the within-CIR and above-CIR passes). The cir keyword optionally limits the first pass bandwidth allocated to the priority level during the within-CIR pass.
When executing the level command, at least one of the optional keywords, rate or cir, must be specified. If neither keyword is included, the command will fail.
If a previous explicit value for rate or cir exists when the level command is executed, and either rate or cir is omitted, the previous value for the parameter is overwritten by the default value and the previous value is lost.
The configured priority level rate limits may be overridden at the egress port or channel using the egress-scheduler-override level priority-level command. When a scheduler instance has an override defined for a priority level, both the rate and cir values are overridden even when one of them is not explicitly expressed in the override command. For instance, if the cir kilobits per second portion of the override is not expressed, the scheduler instance defaults to not having a CIR rate limit for the priority level even when the port scheduler policy has an explicit CIR limit defined.
The no form of this command returns the level to its default value.
Default
no level priority-level
Parameters
- priority-level
-
Specifies to which priority level the level command pertains. Each of the eight levels is represented by an integer value of 1 to 8, with 8 being the highest priority level.
- pir-rate
-
Specifies the total bandwidth limits allocated to priority-level, in kilobits per second.
- pir-percent
-
Specifies the percent bandwidth limits allocated to priority-level.
- cir-rate
-
The cir specified limits the total bandwidth allocated in the within-CIR distribution pass to priority-level. When cir is not specified, all the available port or channel bandwidth may be allocated to the specified priority level during the within-CIR pass.
- cir-percent
-
Specifies the percent bandwidth limits allocated to priority-level.
- group name
-
specifies the existing group that the weighted scheduler group this level maps to, up to 32 characters.
- weight
-
Specifies the weight of the level within this weighted scheduler group.
- monitor-threshold percent
-
Specifies the percent of the configured rate. If the offered rate exceeds the configured threshold, a counter monitoring the threshold will be increased.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
level
Syntax
level syslog-level
no level
Context
[Tree] (config>log>syslog level)
Full Context
configure log syslog level
Description
This command configures the syslog message severity level threshold. All messages with severity level equal to or higher than the threshold are sent to the syslog target host.
Only a single threshold level can be specified. If multiple levels are entered, the last level entered will overwrite the previously entered commands.
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
Default
level info
Parameters
- value
-
Specifies the threshold severity level name.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
level
Syntax
level {1 | 2}
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis level)
[Tree] (config>router>isis>interface level)
Full Context
configure router isis level
configure router isis interface level
Description
This command creates the context to configure IS-IS Level 1 or Level 2 area attributes.
A router can be configured as a Level 1, Level 2, or Level 1/2 system. A Level 1 adjacency can be established if there is at least one area address shared by this router and a neighbor. A Level 2 adjacency cannot be established over this interface.
Level 1/2 adjacency is created if the neighbor is also configured as Level 1/2 router and has at least one area address in common. A Level 2 adjacency is established if there are no common area IDs.
A Level 2 adjacency is established if another router is configured as Level 2 or a Level 1/2 router with interfaces configured as Level 1/2 or Level 2. Level 1 adjacencies are not established over this interface.
To reset global and/or interface level parameters to the default, the following commands must be entered independently:
— level>no hello-authentication-key
— level>no hello-authentication-type
— level>no hello-interval
— level>no hello-multiplier
— level>no metric
— level>no passive
— level>no priority
Default
level 1 or level 2
Parameters
- 1
-
Specifies the IS-IS operational characteristics of the interface at level 1.
- 2
-
Specifies the IS-IS operational characteristics of the interface at level 2.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
level
Syntax
level {1 | 2}
no level
Context
[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>entry>from level)
[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>entry>to level)
Full Context
configure router policy-options policy-statement entry from level
configure router policy-options policy-statement entry to level
Description
This command specifies the ISIS route level as a match criterion for the entry.
Default
no level
Parameters
- 1 | 2
-
Matches the IS-IS route learned from level 1 or level 2.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
level-capability
level-capability
Syntax
level-capability {level-1 | level-2 | level-1/2}
no level-capability
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis level-capability)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>if level-capability)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis level-capability
configure service vprn isis interface level-capability
Description
This command configures the routing level for an instance of the IS-IS routing process.
An IS-IS router and an IS-IS interface can operate at Level 1, Level 2 or both Level 1 and 2.
Potential Adjacency Capabilities displays configuration combinations and the potential adjacencies that can be formed.
Global Level |
Interface Level |
Potential Adjacency |
---|---|---|
L 1/2 |
L 1/2 |
Level 1 and/or Level 2 |
L 1/2 |
L 1 |
Level 1 only |
L 1/2 |
L 2 |
Level 2 only |
L 2 |
L 1/2 |
Level 2 only |
L 2 |
L 2 |
Level 2 only |
L 2 |
L 1 |
none |
L 1 |
L 1/2 |
Level 1 only |
L 1 |
L 2 |
none |
L 1 |
L 1 |
Level 1 only |
The no form of this command removes the level capability from the configuration.
Default
level-capability level-1/2
Parameters
- level-1
-
Specifies the router/interface can operate at Level 1 only.
- level-2
-
Specifies the router/interface can operate at Level 2 only.
- level-1/2
-
Specifies the router/interface can operate at both Level 1 and Level 2.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
level-capability
Syntax
level-capability {level-1 | level-2 | level-1/2}
no level-capability
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis level-capability)
[Tree] (config>router>isis>interface level-capability)
Full Context
configure router isis level-capability
configure router isis interface level-capability
Description
This command configures the routing level for an instance of the IS-IS routing process.
An IS-IS router and an IS-IS interface can operate at Level 1, Level 2 or both Level 1 and 2.
Potential Adjacency displays configuration combinations and the potential adjacencies that can be formed.
Global Level |
Interface Level |
Potential Adjacency |
---|---|---|
L 1/2 |
L 1/2 |
Level 1 and/or Level 2 |
L 1/2 |
L 1 |
Level 1 only |
L 1/2 |
L 2 |
Level 2 only |
L 2 |
L 1/2 |
Level 2 only |
L 2 |
L 2 |
Level 2 only |
L 2 |
L 1 |
— |
L 1 |
L 1/2 |
Level 1 only |
L 1 |
L 2 |
— |
L 1 |
L 1 |
Level 1 only |
The no form of this command removes the level capability from the configuration.
Default
level-capability level-1/2
Parameters
- level-1
-
Specifies the router/interface can operate at Level 1only.
- level-2
-
Specifies the router/interface can operate at Level 2 only.
- level-1/2
-
Specifies the router/interface can operate at both Level 1 and Level 2.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lfa-policy-map
lfa-policy-map
Syntax
lfa-policy-map route-nh-template template-name
no lfa-policy-map
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>if lfa-policy-map)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis interface lfa-policy-map
Description
This command applies a route next-hop policy template to the IS-IS interface for the VPRN instance.
When a route next-hop policy template is applied to an interface in IS-IS, it is applied in both level 1 and level 2. When a route next-hop policy template is applied to an interface in OSPF, it is applied in all areas. However, the command in an OSPF interface context can only be executed under the area in which the specified interface is primary and then applied in that area and in all other areas where the interface is secondary. If the user attempts to apply it to an area where the interface is secondary, the command fails.
If the user excluded the interface from LFA using the command loopfree-alternate-exclude, the LFA policy, if applied to the interface, has no effect.
Finally, if the user applied a route next-hop policy template to a loopback interface or to the system interface, the command will not be rejected, but it will result in no action being taken.
The no form deletes the mapping of a route next-hop policy template to an OSPF or IS-IS interface.
Parameters
- template-name
-
Specifies the name of the template, up to 32 characters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lfa-policy-map
Syntax
lfa-policy-map route-nh-template template-name
no lfa-policy-map
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>if lfa-policy-map)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3>area>if lfa-policy-map)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf3>area>if lfa-policy-map)
[Tree] (config>router>isis>if lfa-policy-map)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area>if lfa-policy-map)
Full Context
configure service vprn ospf area interface lfa-policy-map
configure service vprn ospf3 area interface lfa-policy-map
configure router ospf3 area interface lfa-policy-map
configure router isis interface lfa-policy-map
configure router ospf area interface lfa-policy-map
Description
This command applies a route next-hop policy template to an OSPF or IS-IS interface.
When a route next-hop policy template is applied to an interface in IS-IS, it is applied in both level 1 and level 2. When a route next-hop policy template is applied to an interface in OSPF, it is applied in all areas. However, the command in an OSPF interface context can only be executed under the area in which the specified interface is primary and then applied in that area and in all other areas where the interface is secondary. If the user attempts to apply it to an area where the interface is secondary, the command fails.
If the user excluded the interface from LFA using the command loopfree-alternate-exclude, the LFA policy, if applied to the interface, has no effect.
Finally, if the user applied a route next-hop policy template to a loopback interface or to the system interface, the command will not be rejected, but it results in no action being taken.
The no form deletes the mapping of a route next-hop policy template to an OSPF or IS-IS interface.
Default
no lfa-policy-map
Parameters
- template-name
-
Specifies the name of the template, up to 32 characters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
license
license
Syntax
license
Context
[Tree] (admin>system license)
Full Context
admin system license
Description
Enters a context for administrative commands related to licensing.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
license-file
license-file
Syntax
license-file file-url
no license-file
Context
[Tree] (bof license-file)
Full Context
bof license-file
Description
This command configures the license location and file name.
The no form of this command removes the file URL from the configuration.
Parameters
- file-url
-
Specifies the file-url.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lifetime
lifetime
Syntax
lifetime {seconds | forever}
Context
[Tree] (config>system>script-control>script-policy lifetime)
Full Context
configure system script-control script-policy lifetime
Description
This command is used to configure the maximum amount of time that a script may run.
Default
lifetime 3600
Parameters
- seconds
-
Specifies the maximum amount of time that a script may run, in seconds.
- forever
-
Specifies to allow a script to run indefinitely.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
limit-init-exchange
limit-init-exchange
Syntax
limit-init-exchange [reduced-max-exchange-timeout seconds]
no limit-init-exchange
Context
[Tree] (config>ipsec>ike-policy limit-init-exchange)
Full Context
configure ipsec ike-policy limit-init-exchange
Description
This command limits the number of ongoing IKEv2 initial exchanges per tunnel to 1. When the system receives a new IKEv2 IKE_SA_INIT request when there is an ongoing IKEv2 initial exchange from same peer, then system reduces the timeout value of the existing exchange to the specified reduced-max-exchange-timeout. If the reduced-max-exchange-timeout is disabled, then the system does not reduce the timeout value.
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
Default
limit-init-exchange reduced-max-exchange-timeout 2
Parameters
- seconds
-
Specifies the maximum timeout for the in-progress initial IKE exchange.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
limit-mac-move
limit-mac-move
Syntax
limit-mac-move [blockable | non-blockable]
no limit-mac-move
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp limit-mac-move)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap limit-mac-move)
Full Context
configure service vpls spoke-sdp limit-mac-move
configure service vpls sap limit-mac-move
Description
This command indicates whether or not the mac-move agent, when enabled using config>service>vpls>mac-move or config>service>epipe>mac-move, limits the MAC re-learn (move) rate on this SAP.
Default
limit-mac-move blockable
Parameters
- blockable
-
Specifies that the agent monitors the MAC re-learn rate on the SAP, and it blocks it when the re-learn rate is exceeded.
- non-blockable
-
Specifies that this SAP is not blocked, and another blockable SAP is blocked instead.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
limit-mac-move
Syntax
limit-mac-move [blockable | non-blockable]
no limit-mac-move
Context
[Tree] (config>service>pw-template limit-mac-move)
Full Context
configure service pw-template limit-mac-move
Description
This command indicates whether or not the mac-move agent will limit the MAC re-learn (move) rate.
Default
limit-mac-move blockable
Parameters
- blockable
-
The agent will monitor the MAC re-learn rate, and it will block it when the re-learn rate is exceeded.
- non-blockable
-
When specified, a SAP will not be blocked, and another blockable SAP will be blocked instead.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-address
link-address
Syntax
link-address ipv6-address
no link-address
Context
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ipsec-gw>dhcp6 link-address)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-gw>dhcp6 link-address)
Full Context
configure service ies interface sap ipsec-gw dhcp6 link-address
configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-gw dhcp6 link-address
Description
This command specifies the link address of the relayed DHCPv6 packets sent by the system.
Default
no link-address
Parameters
- ipv6-address
-
Specifies a global unicast IPv6 address.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-bandwidth
link-bandwidth
Syntax
link-bandwidth
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor link-bandwidth)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group link-bandwidth)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp group neighbor link-bandwidth
configure service vprn bgp group link-bandwidth
Description
This command enables the configuration context for handling the link-bandwidth extended community attached to specific BGP routes.
When all used multipaths of an IP prefix correspond to BGP routes with a link-bandwidth extended community, the datapath is programmed to do weighted ECMP across the BGP next-hops in proportion to the bandwidth values.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-bandwidth
Syntax
link-bandwidth
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor link-bandwidth)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group link-bandwidth)
Full Context
configure router bgp group neighbor link-bandwidth
configure router bgp group link-bandwidth
Description
This command enables the configuration context for handling the link-bandwidth extended community attached to specific BGP routes.
When all used multipaths of an IP prefix correspond to BGP routes with a link-bandwidth extended community, the datapath is programmed to do weighted ECMP across the BGP next-hops in proportion to the bandwidth values.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-group
link-group
Syntax
[no] link-group link-group-name
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis link-group)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis link-group
Description
This command configures a link-group for the router or VPRN instance.
The no form of this command removes the specified link-group.
Parameters
- link-group-name
-
Name of the link-group to be added or removed from the router or VPRN service.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-group
Syntax
link-group link-group-name
no link-group
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis link-group)
Full Context
configure router isis link-group
Description
This command specifies the IS-IS link group associated with this particular level of the interface.
Default
no link-group
Parameters
- link-group-name
-
Specifies an IS-IS link group name, up to 32 characters in length, on the system.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-local-address
link-local-address
Syntax
link-local-address ipv6-address [dad-disable]
no link-local-address
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipv6 link-local-address)
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipv6 link-local-address)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6 link-local-address)
Full Context
configure service vprn interface ipv6 link-local-address
configure router interface ipv6 link-local-address
configure service ies interface ipv6 link-local-address
Description
This command configures the IPv6 Link Local address that is used as a virtual SRRP IPv6 address by the Master SRRP node. This address is sent in the Router Advertisements initiated by the Master SRRP node. Clients use this address as IPv6 default-gateway. Both SRRP nodes, Master and Backup, must be configured with the same Link Local address.
Only one link-local-address is allowed per interface.
Removing a manually configured link local address may impact routing protocols or static routes that have a dependency on that address. It is not recommended to remove a link local address when there are active IPv6 subscriber hosts on an IES or VPRN interface.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Parameters
- ipv6-address
-
Specifies the IPv6 address in the form:
- dad-disable
-
Disables Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) and sets the address to preferred, even if there is a duplicated address.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-local-modifier
link-local-modifier
Syntax
link-local-modifier modifier
no link-local-modifier
Context
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>secure-nd link-local-modifier)
Full Context
configure service ies interface ipv6 secure-nd link-local-modifier
Description
This command configures the Cryptographically Generated Address (CGA) modifier for link-local addresses.
Parameters
- modifier
-
Specifies the modifier in 32 hexadecimal nibbles.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-local-modifier
Syntax
link-local-modifier modifier
no link-local-modifier
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>send link-local-modifier)
Full Context
configure service vprn interface ipv6 secure-nd link-local-modifier
Description
This command configures the Cryptographically Generated Address (CGA) modifier for link-local addresses.
Parameters
- modifier
-
Specifies the modifier in 32 hexadecimal nibbles.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-local-modifier
Syntax
link-local-modifier modifier
no link-local-modifier
Context
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipv6>secure-nd link-local-modifier)
Full Context
configure router interface ipv6 secure-nd link-local-modifier
Description
This command configures the Cryptographically Generated Address (CGA) modifier for link-local addresses.
Parameters
- modifier
-
Specifies the modifier in 32 hexadecimal nibbles.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-state-export-enable
link-state-export-enable
Syntax
[no] link-state-export-enable
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp link-state-export-enable)
Full Context
configure router bgp link-state-export-enable
Description
This command enables the export of link-state information from the BGP-LS address family into the local Traffic Engineering Database (TED).
The no form of this command disables the export of link state information into the TED.
Default
no link-state-export-enable
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-state-import-enable
link-state-import-enable
Syntax
[no] link-state-import-enable
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp link-state-import-enable)
Full Context
configure router bgp link-state-import-enable
Description
This command enables the import of link-state information into the BGP-LS address family for advertisement to other BGP neighbors.
The no form of this command disables the import of link state information into the BGP-LS address family.
Default
no link-state-import-enable
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-type
link-type
Syntax
link-type {pt-pt | shared}
no link-type [pt-pt | shared]
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>stp link-type)
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-sap-template>stp link-type)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>stp link-type)
Full Context
configure service vpls sap stp link-type
configure service template vpls-sap-template stp link-type
configure service vpls spoke-sdp stp link-type
Description
This command instructs STP on the maximum number of bridges behind this SAP or spoke-SDP. If there is only a single bridge, transitioning to forwarding state will be based on handshaking (fast transitions). If more than two bridges are connected via a shared media, their SAP or spoke-SDPs should all be configured as shared, and timer-based transitions are used.
The no form of this command returns the link type to the default value.
Default
link-type pt-pt
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
link-type
Syntax
link-type {pt-pt | shared}
no link-type
Context
[Tree] (config>service>pw-template>stp link-type)
Full Context
configure service pw-template stp link-type
Description
This command instructs STP on the maximum number of bridges behind this SAP or spoke SDP. If there is only a single bridge, transitioning to forwarding state will be based on handshaking (fast transitions). If more than two bridges are connected via a shared media, their SAP or spoke SDPs should all be configured as shared, and timer-based transitions are used.
The no form of this command returns the link type to the default value.
Default
link-type pt-pt
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
listen
listen
Syntax
listen
Context
[Tree] (config>system>netconf listen)
Full Context
configure system netconf listen
Description
Commands in this context configure NETCONF listening parameters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
listening-port
listening-port
Syntax
listening-port port
no listening-port
Context
[Tree] (config>system>grpc listening-port)
Full Context
configure system grpc listening-port
Description
This command configures the listening port for the gRPC server.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Default
listening-port 57400
Parameters
- port
-
Specifies the port number.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
listening-port
Syntax
listening-port port
no listening-port
Context
[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh listening-port)
Full Context
configure system security ssh listening-port
Description
This command configures the default SSH port for SSH connections arriving in VPRN or base routing.
The no form of this command configures the default SSH port to 22.
Default
no listening-port
Parameters
- port
-
Specifies the port number.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
listening-port
Syntax
listening-port port
no listening-port
Context
[Tree] (config>system>security>telnet listening-port)
Full Context
configure system security telnet listening-port
Description
This command configures the default Telnet port for Telnet connections arriving in VPRN or base routing.
The no form of this command configures the default Telnet port to 23.
Default
no listening-port
Parameters
- port
-
Specifies the port number.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lldp
lldp
Syntax
lldp
Context
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet lldp)
Full Context
configure port ethernet lldp
Description
Commands in this context configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) parameters on the specified port.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lldp
Syntax
lldp
Context
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet lldp)
Full Context
configure port ethernet lldp
Description
Commands in this context configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) parameters on the specified port.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lldp
Syntax
lldp
Context
[Tree] (config>system lldp)
Full Context
configure system lldp
Description
Commands in this context configure system-wide Link Layer Discovery Protocol parameters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lldp-member-template
lldp-member-template
Syntax
lldp-member-template
Context
[Tree] (config>lag lldp-member-template)
Full Context
configure lag lldp-member-template
Description
Commands in this context configure the LLDP parameters for member ports.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load
load
Syntax
load file-url [overwrite | insert | append]
Context
[Tree] (candidate load)
Full Context
candidate load
Description
This command loads a previously saved candidate configuration into the current candidate. The edit point will be set to the end of the loaded configuration lines. The candidate configuration cannot be modified while a load is in progress.
Default
If the candidate is empty then a load without any of the optional parameters (such as overwrite, and so on) will load the file-url into the candidate. If the candidate is not empty then one of the options, such as overwrite, insert, and so on, must be specified.
Parameters
- file-url
-
Specifies the directory and filename to load.
- overwrite
-
Discards the contents of the current candidate and replace it with the contents of the file.
- insert
-
Inserts the contents of the file at the current edit point.
- append
-
Inserts the contents of the file at the end of the current candidate.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing
load-balancing
Syntax
load-balancing
Context
[Tree] (config>service>epipe load-balancing)
Full Context
configure service epipe load-balancing
Description
This command enables the load-balancing context to configure interface per-flow load balancing options that will apply to traffic entering this interface and egressing over a LAG/ECMP on system-egress. This is a per interface setting. For load-balancing options that can also be enabled on the system level, the options enabled on the interface level overwrite system level configurations.
Default
not applicable
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing
Syntax
load-balancing
Context
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-template load-balancing)
Full Context
configure service template vpls-template load-balancing
Description
This command enables the load-balancing context to configure interface per-flow load balancing options that will apply to traffic entering this interface and egressing over a LAG/ECMP on system-egress. This is a per interface setting. For load-balancing options that can also be enabled on the system level, the options enabled on the interface level overwrite system level configurations.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing
Syntax
load-balancing
Context
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if load-balancing)
Full Context
configure service ies interface load-balancing
Description
This command enables the load-balancing context to configure interface per-flow load balancing options that will apply to traffic entering this interface and egressing over a LAG/ECMP on system-egress. This is a per interface setting. For load balancing options that can also be enabled on the system level, the options enabled on the interface level overwrite system level configurations.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing
Syntax
load-balancing
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nw-if load-balancing)
Full Context
configure service vprn network-interface load-balancing
Description
This command enables the load-balancing context to configure interface per-flow load balancing options that will apply to traffic entering this interface and egressing over a LAG/ECMP on system-egress. This is a per interface setting. For load-balancing options that can also be enabled on the system level, the options enabled on the interface level overwrite system level configurations.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing
Syntax
load-balancing
Context
[Tree] (config>router>if load-balancing)
Full Context
configure router interface load-balancing
Description
This command enables the load-balancing context to configure interface per-flow load balancing options that will apply to traffic entering this interface and egressing over a LAG/ECMP on system-egress. This is a per interface setting. For load-balancing options that can also be enabled on the system level, the options enabled on the interface level overwrite system level configurations.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing
Syntax
load-balancing
Context
[Tree] (config>system load-balancing)
Full Context
configure system load-balancing
Description
This command enables the load-balancing context to configure the interface per-flow load balancing options that will apply to traffic entering this interface and egressing over a LAG/ECMP on system-egress. This is a per interface setting. For load-balancing options that can also be enabled on the system level, the options enabled on the interface level overwrite system level configurations.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing-algorithm
load-balancing-algorithm
Syntax
load-balancing-algorithm option
no load-balancing-algorithm
Context
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet load-balancing-algorithm)
Full Context
configure port ethernet load-balancing-algorithm
Description
This command specifies the load balancing algorithm to be used on this port.
In the default mode, no load-balancing-algorithm, the port inherits the global settings. The value is not applicable for ports that do not pass any traffic.
The configuration of load-balancing-algorithm at logical port level has three possible values:
-
include-l4 — Enables inherits system-wide settings including Layer 4 source and destination port value in hashing algorithm.
-
exclude-l4 — Layer 4 source and destination port value will not be included in hashing.
-
no load-balancing-algorithm — Inherits system-wide settings.
The hashing algorithm addresses finer spraying granularity where many hosts are connected to the network. To address more efficient traffic distribution between network links (forming a LAG group), a hashing algorithm extension takes into account Layer 4 information (src/dst L4-protocol port). The hashing index can be calculated according to the following algorithm:
If [(TCP or UDP traffic) & enabled]
hash (<TCP/UDP ports>, <IP addresses>)
else if (IP traffic)
hash (<IP addresses>)
else
hash (<MAC addresses>)
endif
This algorithm will be used in all cases where IP information in per-packet hashing is included (refer to "Traffic Load Balancing Options” in the 7705 SAR Gen 2 Interface Configuration Guide). However the Layer 4 information (TCP/UDP ports) will not be used in the following cases:
-
fragmented packets
Default
no load-balancing-algorithm
Parameters
- option
-
Specifies the load balancing algorithm to be used on this port.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing-weight
load-balancing-weight
Syntax
load-balancing-weight value
no load-balancing-weight [value]
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>next-hop load-balancing-weight)
Full Context
configure service vprn static-route-entry next-hop load-balancing-weight
Description
This command configures a weighted ECMP load-balancing weight for a static route next-hop.
If all of the ECMP next-hops of a static route have a configured load-balancing-weight then packets matching the route are sprayed according to the relative weights. In other words, the next-hop interface with the largest load-balancing weight should receive the most forwarded traffic if weighted ECMP is applicable.
The no form of this command disables weighted ECMP for the interface and effectively disables weighted ECMP for the entire static route.
Parameters
- value
-
Specifies the cost metric value.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing-weight
Syntax
load-balancing-weight [weight]
no load-balancing-weight
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3>area>if load-balancing-weight)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>if load-balancing-weight)
Full Context
configure service vprn ospf3 area interface load-balancing-weight
configure service vprn ospf area interface load-balancing-weight
Description
This command configures the weighted ECMP load-balancing weight for an IS-IS, OSPF, and OSPF3 interface. If the interface becomes an ECMP next hop for an IPv4 or IPv6 route, and all the other ECMP next hops are interfaces with configured (non-zero) load-balancing weights, then the traffic distribution over the ECMP interfaces is proportional to the weights. This means that the interface with the largest load-balancing weight receives the most forwarded traffic if weighted ECMP is applicable.
The no form of this command disables weighted ECMP for the interface which effectively disables weighted ECMP for any IP prefix that has this interface as a next hop.
Default
no load-balancing-weight
Parameters
- weight
-
Specifies the load balancing weight.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing-weight
Syntax
load-balancing-weight weight
no load-balancing-weight
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>if load-balancing-weight)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis interface load-balancing-weight
Description
This command configures the weighted ECMP load-balancing weight for an IS-IS interface of the VPRN. If the interface becomes an ECMP next-hop for IPv4 or IPv6 route and all the other ECMP next-hops are interfaces with configured (non-zero) load-balancing weights, then the traffic distribution over the ECMP interfaces is proportional to the weights. In other words, the interface with the largest load-balancing-weight should receive the most forwarded traffic if weighted ECMP is applicable.
The no form of this command disables weighted ECMP for the interface and, therefore, effectively disables weighted ECMP for any IP prefix that has this interface as a next-hop.
Default
no load-balancing-weight
Parameters
- weight
-
Specifies the load balancing weight.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing-weight
Syntax
load-balancing-weight weight
no load-balancing-weight
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ldp>if-params>if load-balancing-weight)
Full Context
configure router ldp interface-parameters interface load-balancing-weight
Description
This command configures the load balancing weight for the LDP interface. The load balancing weight, normalized to 64, is used for weighted ECMP of LDP labeled packets over direct network IP interfaces.
If the interface becomes an ECMP next hop for an LDP FEC, and all the other ECMP next hops are interfaces with configured (non-zero) load-balancing weights, then the traffic distribution over the ECMP interfaces is proportional to the normalized weight with a granularity of 64.
If one or more of the LDP interfaces in the ECMP set does not have a configured load-balancing weight, then the system falls back to ECMP.
The no form of this command removes the load balancing weight for the LDP interface.
Parameters
- weight
-
Specifies the load balancing weight value.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing-weight
Syntax
load-balancing-weight weight
no load-balancing-weight
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp load-balancing-weight)
Full Context
configure router mpls lsp load-balancing-weight
Description
This command assigns a weight to an MPLS LSP for use in the weighted load-balancing, or weighted ECMP, over MPLS feature.
Parameters
- weight
-
Specifies a 32-bit integer representing the weight of the LSP.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing-weight
Syntax
load-balancing-weight value
no load-balancing-weight [value]
Context
[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>next-hop load-balancing-weight)
Full Context
configure router static-route-entry next-hop load-balancing-weight
Description
This command configures a weighted ECMP load-balancing weight for a static route next-hop.
If all of the ECMP next-hops of a static route have a configured load-balancing-weight then packets matching the route are sprayed according to the relative weights. In other words, the next-hop interface with the largest load-balancing weight should receive the most forwarded traffic if weighted ECMP is applicable.
The no form of this command disables weighted ECMP for the interface and effectively disables weighted ECMP for the entire static route.
Parameters
- value
-
Specifies the load balancing weight value.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing-weight
Syntax
load-balancing-weight [value]
no load-balancing-weight
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis>interface load-balancing-weight)
Full Context
configure router isis interface load-balancing-weight
Description
This command configures the weighted ECMP load-balancing weight for an IS-IS interface. If the interface becomes an ECMP next hop for an IPv4 or IPv6 route, and all the other ECMP next hops are interfaces with configured (non-zero) load-balancing weights, then the traffic distribution over the ECMP interfaces is proportional to the weights. In other words, the interface with the largest load-balancing weight should receive the most forwarded traffic if weighted ECMP is applicable.
The no form of this command disables weighted ECMP for the interface and therefore effectively disables weighted ECMP for any IP prefix that has this interface as a next hop.
Default
no load-balancing-weight
Parameters
- value
-
0 to 4294967295
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
load-balancing-weight
Syntax
load-balancing-weight [weight]
no load-balancing-weight
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ospf3>area>if load-balancing-weight)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area>if load-balancing-weight)
Full Context
configure router ospf3 area interface load-balancing-weight
configure router ospf area interface load-balancing-weight
Description
This command configures the weighted ECMP load-balancing weight for an OSPF or OSPF3 interface. If the interface becomes an ECMP next hop for an IPv4 or IPv6 route, and all the other ECMP next hops are interfaces with configured (non-zero) load-balancing weights, then the traffic distribution over the ECMP interfaces is proportional to the weights. This means that the interface with the largest load-balancing weight receives the most forwarded traffic if weighted ECMP is applicable.
The no form of this command disables weighted ECMP for the interface which effectively disables weighted ECMP for any IP prefix that has this interface as a next hop.
Default
no load-balancing-weight
Parameters
- weight
-
Specifies the load balancing weight.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local
local
Syntax
local [inherit | all | vc-only | none]
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ttl-propagate local)
Full Context
configure service vprn ttl-propagate local
Description
This command overrides the global configuration of the TTL propagation for locally generated packets which are forwarded over a MPLS LSPs in a given VPRN service context.
The global configuration is performed under config>router>ttl-propagate>vprn-local.
The default behavior for a given VPRN instance is to inherit the global configuration for the same command. The user can explicitly set the default behavior by configuring the inherit value
Default
local inherit
Parameters
- inherit
-
Specifies the TTL propagation behavior is inherited from the global configuration under config>router>ttl-propagate>vprn-local.
- none
-
Specifies the TTL of the IP packet is not propagated into the VC label or labels in the transport label stack.
- vc-only
-
Specifies the TTL of the IP packet is propagated into the VC label and not into the labels in the transport label stack.
- all
-
Specifies the TTL of the IP packet is propagated into the VC label and all labels in the transport label stack.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local
Syntax
local
Context
[Tree] (config>ipsec>ts-list local)
Full Context
configure ipsec ts-list local
Description
Commands in this context configure local TS-list parameters. The TS-list is the traffic selector of the local system, such as TSr, when the system acts as an IKEv2 responder.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-address
local-address
Syntax
local-address ip-address
no local-address
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group local-address)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor local-address)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp group local-address
configure service vprn bgp group neighbor local-address
Description
Configures the local IP address used by the group or neighbor when communicating with BGP peers.
Outgoing connections use the local-address as the source of the TCP connection when initiating connections with a peer.
When a local address is not specified, the OS uses the system IP address when communicating with IBGP peers and uses the interface address for directly connected EBGP peers. This command is used at the neighbor level to revert to the value defined under the group level.
The no form of this command removes the configured local-address for BGP.
The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.
The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.
Parameters
- no local-address
-
The router ID is used when communicating with IBGP peers and the interface address is used for directly connected EBGP peers.
- ip-address
-
The local address expressed in dotted decimal notation. Allowed values are a valid routable IP address on the router, either an interface or system IP address.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-address
Syntax
local-address ip-address
no local-address
Context
[Tree] (config>router>pcep>pcc local-address)
Full Context
configure router pcep pcc local-address
Description
This command configures the local IPv4 address of the PCEP speaker.
The PCEP protocol operates over TCP using destination TCP port 4189. The PCE client (PCC) always initiates the connection. After the user configures the PCEP local IPv4 address and the peer IPv4 address on the PCC, the latter initiates a TCP connection to the PCE. If both a local IPv4 and a local IPv6 address are configured, the connection uses the local address that is the same family as the peer address. When the connection is established, the PCC and PCE exchange OPEN messages, which initializes the PCEP session and exchanges the session parameters to be negotiated.
By default, the PCC attempts to reach the remote PCE address out of band using the management port. If it cannot, it attempts to reach the remote PCE address in band. The user can change the configuration of the peer to attempt connecting in band only or out of band only. When the session comes up out of band, the management IP address is used as the local address. The local IPv4 address configured by the user is only used for in-band sessions and is otherwise ignored.
The no form of the command removes the configured local address of the PCEP speaker.
Parameters
- ip-address
-
Specifies the IP address of the PCEP speaker to be used for in-band sessions.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-address
Syntax
local-address ip-address
no local-address
Context
[Tree] (config>router>origin-validation>rpki-session local-address)
Full Context
configure router origin-validation rpki-session local-address
Description
This command configures the local address to use for setting up the TCP connection used by an RPKI-Router session. The default local-address is the outgoing interface IPv4 or IPv6 address. The local-address cannot be changed without first shutting down the session.
Default
no local-address
Parameters
- ip-address
-
Specifies an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-address
Syntax
local-address [ip-int-name | ip-address | ipv6-address]
no local-address
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group local-address)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor local-address)
Full Context
configure router bgp group local-address
configure router bgp group neighbor local-address
Description
This command configures the local IP address used by the group or neighbor when communicating with BGP peers.
Outgoing connections use the local-address as the source of the TCP connection when initiating connections with a peer.
When a local address is not specified, the router uses the system IP address when communicating with IBGP peers and uses the interface address for directly connected EBGP peers. This command is used at the neighbor level to revert to the value defined under the group level.
When set to a router interface, the local-address inherits the primary IPv4 or IPv6 address of the router interface depending on whether BGP is configured for IPv4 or IPv6. If the corresponding IPv4 or IPv6 address is not configured on the router interface, the BGP sessions that have this interface set as the local-address are kept down until an interface address is configured on the router interface.
The no form of this command removes the configured local-address for BGP.
The no form of this command used at the group level returns the configuration to the value defined at the global level.
The no form of this command used at the neighbor level returns the configuration to the value defined at the group level.
Default
no local-address
Parameters
- ip-address
-
Specifies the local address expressed in dotted decimal notation. Allowed value is a valid routable IP address on the router, either an interface or system IP address.
- ipv6-address
-
Specifies the local address expressed in dotted decimal notation. Allowed value is a valid routable IPv6 address on the router, either an interface or system IPv6 address.
- ip-int-name
-
Specifies the IP interface name whose address the local address will inherit. The interface can be any network interface configured on the system.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-address-assignment
local-address-assignment
Syntax
[no] local-address-assignment
Context
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ipsec-gw local-address-assignment)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-gw local-address-assignment)
Full Context
configure service ies interface sap ipsec-gw local-address-assignment
configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-gw local-address-assignment
Description
Commands in this context configure local address assignments for the IPsec gateway.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-address-ipv6
local-address-ipv6
Syntax
local-address-ipv6 ipv6-address
no local-address-ipv6
Context
[Tree] (config>router>pcep>pcc local-address-ipv6)
Full Context
configure router pcep pcc local-address-ipv6
Description
This command configures the local IPv6 address of the PCEP speaker.
The PCEP protocol operates over TCP using destination TCP port 4189. The PCE client (PCC) always initiates the connection. After the user configures the PCEP local IPv6 address and the peer IPv6 address on the PCC, the latter initiates a TCP connection to the PCE. If both a local IPv4 and a local IPv6 address are configured, the connection uses the local address that is the same family as the peer address. When the connection is established, the PCC and PCE exchange OPEN messages, which initializes the PCEP session and exchanges the session parameters to be negotiated.
By default, the PCC attempts to reach the remote PCE address out of band using the management port. If it cannot, it attempts to reach the remote PCE address in-band. The user can change the configuration of the peer to attempt connecting in band only or out of band only. When the session comes up out of band, the management IP address is used as the local address. The local IPv6 address configured by the user is only used for in-band sessions and is otherwise ignored.
The no form of the command removes the configured local address of the PCEP speaker.
Parameters
- ipv6-address
-
Specifies the IP address of the PCEP speaker to be used for in-band sessions.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-age
local-age
Syntax
local-age aging-timer
no local-age [aging-timer]
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vpls local-age)
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-template local-age)
Full Context
configure service vpls local-age
configure service template vpls-template local-age
Description
Specifies the aging time for locally learned MAC addresses in the forwarding database (FDB) for the Virtual Private LAN Service (VPLS) instance. In a VPLS service, MAC addresses are associated with a Service Access Point (SAP) or with a service destination point (SDP). MACs associated with a SAP are classified as local MACs, and MACs associated with an SDP are remote MACs.
Like in a Layer 2 switch, learned MACs can be aged out if no packets are sourced from the MAC address for a period of time (the aging time). In each VPLS service instance, there are independent aging timers for local learned MAC and remote learned MAC entries in the FDB. The local-age timer specifies the aging time for local learned MAC addresses.
The no form of this command returns the local aging timer to the default value.
Default
local age 300 — Local MACs aged after 300 seconds.
Parameters
- aging-timer
-
Specifies the aging time for local MACs expressed in seconds
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-as
local-as
Syntax
local-as as-number [private] [no-prepend-global-as]
no local-as
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor local-as)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp local-as)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group local-as)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp group neighbor local-as
configure service vprn bgp local-as
configure service vprn bgp group local-as
Description
This command configures a BGP virtual autonomous system (AS) number.
In addition to the global AS number configured for BGP in the config>router>autonomous-system context, a virtual (local) AS number can be configured to support various AS number migration scenarios. The local AS number is added to the to the beginning the as-path attribute ahead of the router’s AS number.
This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all EBGP peers), group level (applies to all EBGP peers in peer-group) or neighbor level (only applies to EBGP specified peer). Thus, by specifying this at each neighbor level, it is possible to have a separate local-as per EBGP session. The local-as command is not supported for IBGP sessions. When the optional private keyword is specified in the command the local-as number is not added to inbound routes from the EBGP peer that has local-as in effect.
When a command is entered multiple times for the same AS, the last command entered is used in the configuration. The private attribute can be added or removed dynamically by reissuing the command.
Changing the local AS at the global level in an active BGP instance causes the BGP instance to restart with the new local AS number. Changing the local AS at the global level in an active BGP instance causes BGP to re-establish the peer relationships with all peers in the group with the new local AS number. Changing the local AS at the neighbor level in an active BGP instance causes BGP to re-establish the peer relationship with the new local AS number.
This is an optional command and can be used in the following circumstance:
Provider router P is moved from AS1 to AS2. The customer router that is connected to P, however, is configured to belong to AS1. To avoid reconfiguring the customer router, the local-as value on router P can be set to AS1. Thus, router P adds AS1 to the as-path message for routes it advertises to the customer router.
The no form of this command used at the global level removes any virtual AS number configured.
The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.
The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.
Default
no local-as
Parameters
- as-number
-
The virtual autonomous system number, expressed as a decimal integer.
- private
-
Specifies the local-as is hidden in paths learned from the peering.
- no-prepend-global-as
-
Specifies that the global-as is hidden in paths announced to the EBGP peer.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-as
Syntax
local-as as-number [private] [no-prepend-global-as]
no local-as
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp local-as)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor local-as)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group local-as)
Full Context
configure router bgp local-as
configure router bgp group neighbor local-as
configure router bgp group local-as
Description
This command configures a BGP local autonomous system (AS) number. In addition to the global AS number configured for BGP using the autonomous-system command, a local AS number can be configured to support various AS number migration scenarios.
When the local-as command is applied to a BGP neighbor and the local-as is different from the peer-as, the session comes up as EBGP and by default the global-AS number and then (in that order) the local-as number are prepended to the AS_PATH attribute in outbound routes sent to the peer. In received routes from the EBGP peer, the local AS is prepended to the AS path by default, but this can be disabled with the private option.
When the local-as command is applied to a BGP neighbor and the local-as is the same as the peer-as, the session comes up as IBGP, and by default, the global-AS number is prepended to the AS_PATH attribute in outbound routes sent to the peer.
This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all BGP peers), group level (applies to all BGP peers in group) or neighbor level (only applies to one specific BGP neighbor). By specifying this at the neighbor level, it is possible to have a separate local-as for each BGP session.
When the optional no-prepend-global-as command is configured, the global-as number is not added in outbound routes sent to an IBGP or EBGP peer.
When a command is entered multiple times for the same AS, the last command entered is used in the configuration. The private option can be added or removed dynamically by reissuing the command. Changing the local AS at the global level in an active BGP instance causes the BGP instance to restart with the new local AS number. Changing the local AS at the global level in an active BGP instance causes BGP to re-establish the peer relationships with all peers in the group with the new local AS number. Changing the local AS at the neighbor level in an active BGP instance causes BGP to re-establish the peer relationship with the new local AS number.
The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.
The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.
Default
no local-as
Parameters
- as-number
-
Specifies the virtual autonomous system number expressed as a decimal integer.
- private
-
Specifies the local-as is hidden in paths learned from the peering.
- no-prepend-global-as
-
Specifies that the global-as is hidden in paths announced to the BGP peer.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-attachment-circuit
local-attachment-circuit
Syntax
local-attachment-circuit ac-name [endpoint endpoint-name] [bgp bgp-instance] [create]
no local-attachment-circuit ac-name
Context
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>bgp-evpn local-attachment-circuit)
Full Context
configure service epipe bgp-evpn local-attachment-circuit
Description
This command configures a local attachment circuit (AC) in which the local Ethernet tag can be configured.
The no form of this command disables the context.
Default
no local-attachment-circuit
Parameters
- ac-name
-
Specifies the name of the local attachment circuit, up to 32 characters.
- endpoint-name
-
Specifies the name of the endpoint, up to 32 characters.
- bgp-instance
-
Specifies the BGP instance ID.
- create
-
Keyword used to create the local AC.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-dhcp-server
local-dhcp-server
Syntax
local-dhcp-server server-name [create]
no local-dhcp-server server-name
Context
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp local-dhcp-server)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp local-dhcp-server)
Full Context
configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server
configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server
Description
This command instantiates a local DHCP server. A local DHCP server can serve multiple interfaces but is limited to the routing context it was which it was created.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Parameters
- server-name
-
Specifies the name of local DHCP server, up to 32 characters.
- create
-
Keyword used to create the local DHCP server. The create keyword requirement can be enabled or disabled in the environment>create context.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-dhcp-server
Syntax
local-dhcp-server server-name [create] [auto-provisioned]
no local-dhcp-server server-name
Context
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp6 local-dhcp-server)
Full Context
configure router dhcp6 local-dhcp-server
Description
This command instantiates a DHCP6 server. A local DHCP6 server can serve multiple interfaces but is limited to the routing context it was which it was created.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Parameters
- server-name
-
Specifies the name of local DHCP6 server, up to 32 characters.
- create
-
Keyword used to create the local DHCP or DHCP6 server. The create keyword requirement can be enabled or disabled in the environment>create context.
- auto-provisioned
-
Specifies the auto provisioning mode. This parameter only applies to DHCP6 creation to configure DHCP6 default values.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-dhcp-server
Syntax
[no] local-dhcp-server server-name [lease-address ip-prefix[prefix-length]]
[no] local-dhcp-server server-name [mac ieee-address]
[no] local-dhcp-server server-name [link-local-address ipv6z-address]
Context
[Tree] (debug>router local-dhcp-server)
Full Context
debug router local-dhcp-server
Description
This command enables, disables or configures debugging for a local DHCP server.
Parameters
- server-name
-
Specifies an existing local DHCP server name.
- ip-prefix[/prefix-length]
-
Specifies the IP prefix and prefix length of the subnet.
- ieee-address
-
Specifies that the provisioned MAC address for the local DHCP server.
- ipv6z-address
-
Specifies the IPv6z address.
ipv6-address:
x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x [-interface]
x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d [-interface]
x: [0 to FFFF]H
d: [0 to 255]D
interface
up to 32 characters, mandatory for link local addresses
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-dhcp-server
Syntax
[no] local-dhcp-server
Context
[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>sync local-dhcp-server)
Full Context
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer sync local-dhcp-server
Description
This command synchronizes DHCP server information.
Default
no local-dhcp-server
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-dhcp-server
Syntax
local-dhcp-server local-server-name
no local-dhcp-server
Context
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if local-dhcp-server)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipv6 local-dhcp-server)
Full Context
configure service ies interface local-dhcp-server
configure service vprn interface ipv6 local-dhcp-server
Description
This command assigns a DHCP server to the interface.
Parameters
- local-server-name
-
Specifies an existing local server name.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-dhcp-server
Syntax
local-dhcp-server local-server-name
no local-dhcp-server
Context
[Tree] (config>router>if local-dhcp-server)
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipv6 local-dhcp-server)
Full Context
configure router interface local-dhcp-server
configure router interface ipv6 local-dhcp-server
Description
This command instantiates a local DHCP server. A local DHCP server can serve multiple interfaces but is limited to the routing context in which it was created.
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
Default
no local-dhcp-server
Parameters
- local-server-name
-
Specifies the name of local DHCP server, up to 32 characters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-end
local-end
Syntax
local-end {ip-address | ipv6-address}
no local-end
Context
[Tree] (config>service>sdp local-end)
Full Context
configure service sdp local-end
Description
This command configures the local-end address of the following SDP encapsulation types:
-
IPv6 address of the termination point of a SDP of encapsulation l2tpv3 (L2TP v3 tunnel).
-
IPv4/IPv6 source address of a SDP of encapsulation eth-gre-bridged (L2oGRE SDP).
-
IPv4 source address of a SDP of encapsulation gre (GRE SDP).
A change to the value of the local-end parameter requires that the SDP be shut down.
When used as the source address of a SDP of encapsulation gre (GRE SDP), the primary IPv4 address of any local network IP interface, loopback or otherwise, may be used.
The address of the following interfaces are not supported:
-
unnumbered network IP interface
-
IES interface
-
VPRN interface
-
CSC VPRN interface
The local-end parameter value adheres to the following rules:
-
A maximum of 15 distinct address values can be configured for all GRE SDPs under the config>service>sdp>local-end context, and all L2oGRE SDPs under the config>service>system>gre-eth-bridged>tunnel-termination context.
-
The same source address cannot be used in both contexts since an address configured for a L2oGRE SDP matches an internally created interface that is not available to other applications.
-
The local-end address of a GRE SDP, when different from system, need not match the primary address of an interface that has the MPLS-over-GRE termination subnet configured, unless a GRE SDP or tunnel from the far-end router terminates on this address.
The no form of the command removes the address from the local-end configuration.
Parameters
- ip-address | ipv6-address
-
Specifies a IPv4 or IPv6 address for local-end of an SDP in dotted decimal notation.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-gateway-address
local-gateway-address
Syntax
local-gateway-address [ip-address | ipv6-address]
no local-gateway-address
Context
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel local-gateway-address)
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel local-gateway-address)
Full Context
configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel local-gateway-address
configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel local-gateway-address
Description
This command configures local gateway address of the IPsec gateway.
Parameters
- ip-address
-
Specifies a unicast IPv4 address, up to 64 characters.
- ipv6-address
-
Specifies a unicast global unicast IPv6 address, up to 64 characters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-gateway-address
Syntax
local-gateway-address ip-address
no local-gateway-address
Context
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ipsec-gw local-gateway-address)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-gw local-gateway-address)
Full Context
configure service ies interface sap ipsec-gw local-gateway-address
configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-gw local-gateway-address
Description
This command configures local gateway address of the IPsec gateway.
Parameters
- ip-address
-
Specifies a unicast IPv4 address or a global unicast IPv6 address. This address must be within the subnet of the public interface.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-gateway-address
Syntax
local-gateway-address ip-address peer ip-address delivery-service service-id
no local-gateway-address
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-tunnel local-gateway-address)
Full Context
configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel local-gateway-address
Description
This command specifies the local gateway address used for the tunnel and the address of the remote security gateway at the other end of the tunnel remote peer IP address to use.
Default
no local-gateway-address
Parameters
- ip-address
-
IP address of the local end of the tunnel.
- delivery-service service-id
-
The ID of the IES or VPRN (front-door) delivery service of this tunnel. Use this service-id to find the VPRN used for delivery.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-id
local-id
Syntax
local-id type [value value]
no local-id
Context
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel>dyn local-id)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-tun>dyn local-id)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel>dyn local-id)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-gw local-id)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ipsec-gw local-id)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel>dyn local-id)
[Tree] (config>ipsec>trans-mode-prof>dyn local-id)
Full Context
configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel dynamic-keying local-id
configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel dynamic-keying local-id
configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel dynamic-keying local-id
configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-gw local-id
configure service ies interface sap ipsec-gw local-id
configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel dynamic-keying local-id
configure ipsec ipsec-transport-mode-profile dynamic-keying local-id
Description
This command specifies the local ID used for IDi or IDr for IKEv2 negotiation.
The default behavior depends on the local-auth-method as follows:
-
Psk: local tunnel IP address
-
Cert-auth: subject of the local certificate
The no form of this command removes the parameters from the configuration.
Default
no local-id
Parameters
- type
-
Specifies the type of local ID payload, which could be IPv4 or IPv6 address or FQDN domain name or distinguish the name of the subject in the X.509 certificate.
- value
-
Specifies the data type as an enumerated integer that describes the local identifier type used for IDi or IDr for IKEv2, up to 255 characters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-ip
local-ip
Syntax
local-ip {ip-prefix/prefix-length | ip-prefix netmask | any}
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ipsec>sec-plcy>entry local-ip)
[Tree] (config>router>ipsec>sec-plcy>entry local-ip)
Full Context
configure service vprn ipsec security-policy entry local-ip
configure router ipsec security-policy entry local-ip
Description
This command configures the local (from the VPN) IP prefix/mask for the policy parameter entry.
Only one entry is necessary to describe a potential flow. The local-ip and remote-ip commands can be defined only once. The system evaluates:
-
the local IP as the source IP when traffic is examined in the direction of the flows from private to public and as the destination IP when traffic flows from public to private
-
the remote IP as the source IP when traffic flows public to private and as the destination IP when traffic flows from private to public
Parameters
- ip-prefix
-
The destination address of the aggregate route in dotted decimal notation
- netmask
-
The subnet mask in dotted decimal notation
- any
-
keyword to specify that it can be any address
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-lsr-id
local-lsr-id
Syntax
local-lsr-id {system | interface} [32bit-format]
local-lsr-id interface-name [32bit-format]
no local-lsr-id
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ldp>if-params>if>ipv4 local-lsr-id)
[Tree] (config>router>ldp>if-params>if>ipv6 local-lsr-id)
Full Context
configure router ldp interface-parameters interface ipv4 local-lsr-id
configure router ldp interface-parameters interface ipv6 local-lsr-id
Description
This command enables the use of the address of the local LDP interface, or any other network interface configured on the system, as the LSR-ID to establish link LDP Hello adjacency and LDP session with directly connected LDP peers. The network interface can be a loopback or not.
Link LDP sessions to all peers discovered over a given LDP interface share the same local LSR-ID. However, LDP sessions on different LDP interfaces can use different network interface addresses as their local LSR-ID.
By default, the LDP session to a peer uses the system interface address as the LSR-ID unless explicitly configured using this command. The system interface must always be configured on the router, or the LDP protocol will not come up on the node. There is no requirement to include the system interface in any routing protocol.
At initial configuration, the LDP session to a peer will remain down while the network interface used as LSR-ID is down. LDP will not try to bring it up using the system interface.
If the network IP interface used as LSR-ID goes down, the LDP sessions to all discovered peers using this LSR-ID go down.
When an interface other than the system is used as the LSR-ID, the transport connection (TCP) for the link LDP session will also use the address of that interface as the transport address. If the system or interface value is configured in the config>router>ldp>if-params>if>ipv4 or config>router>ldp>if-params>if>ipv6> transport-address context, it will be overridden with the address of the LSR-ID interface.
When the local-lsr-id command is enabled with the 32bit-format option, an SR OS LSR will be able to establish an LDP IPv6 Hello adjacency and an LDP IPv6 session with an RFC 7552 compliant peer LSR. The LSR uses a 32-bit LSR-ID set to the value of the IPv4 address of the specified local LSR-ID interface and a 128-bit transport address set to the value of the IPv6 address of the specified local LSR-ID interface.
The system interface cannot be used as a local LSR-ID with the 32bit-format option enabled because the system interface is the default LSR-ID and transport address for all LDP sessions to peers on this LSR. This configuration is blocked in the CLI.
If the user enables the 32bit-format option in the IPv6 context of a running LDP interface, the already established LDP IPv6 Hello adjacency and LDP IPv6 session will be brought down and re-established with the new 32-bit LSR-ID value.
If the user changes the LSR-ID value between system, interface, and interface-name, or enables the 32bit-format option while the LDP session is up, LDP will immediately tear down all sessions using this LSR-ID and will attempt to re-establish them using the new LSR-ID.
The no form of this command returns to the default behavior, in which case the system interface address is used as the LSR-ID.
Default
no local-lsr-id
Parameters
- system
-
Specifies the use of the address of the system interface as the value of the LSR-ID of this LDP LSR.
- interface
-
Specifies the use of the address of the local LDP interface as the value of the LSR-ID of this LDP LSR.
- interface-name interface-name
-
Specifies the name, up to 32 character, of the network IP interface (which address is used as the LSR-ID of this LDP LSP). An interface name cannot be in the form of an IP address. If the string contains special characters (#, ?, space), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
- 32bit-format
-
Specifies the use of the IPv4 address of the local LSR-ID interface as the LSR-ID of this LDP LSR.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-lsr-id
Syntax
local-lsr-id interface-name [32bit-format]
no local-lsr-id
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ldp>targ-session>peer-template local-lsr-id)
[Tree] (config>router>ldp>targ-session>peer local-lsr-id)
Full Context
configure router ldp targeted-session peer-template local-lsr-id
configure router ldp targeted-session peer local-lsr-id
Description
This command enables the use of the address of any network interface configured on the system, as the LSR-ID to establish a targeted LDP Hello adjacency and a targeted LDP session with an LDP peer. The network interface can be a loopback or not.
By default, the targeted LDP session to a peer uses the system interface address as the LSR-ID and as the transport address, unless explicitly configured using this command. The system interface must always be configured on the router, or the LDP protocol will not come up on the node. There is no requirement to include the system interface in any routing protocol.
When the local-lsr-id command is enabled with the 32bit-format option, an SR OS LSR will be able to establish a targeted LDP IPv6 Hello adjacency and a targeted LDP IPv6 session with an RFC 7552 compliant peer LSR. The LSR uses a 32-bit LSR-ID set to the value of the IPv4 address of the specified local LSR-ID interface and a 128-bit transport address set to the value of the IPv6 address of the specified local LSR-ID interface.
The system interface cannot be used as a local LSR-ID with the 32bit-format option enabled because the system interface is the default LSR-ID and transport address for all targeted LDP sessions to peers on this LSR. This configuration is blocked in the CLI.
If the user enables the 32bit-format option in the IPv6 context of a running targeted LDP peer, the already established targeted LDP IPv6 Hello adjacency and targeted LDP IPv6 session will be brought down and re-established with the new 32-bit LSR-ID value.
If the user changes the local LSR-ID value or enables/disables the 32bit-format option, while the targeted LDP session is up, LDP will immediately tear down the targeted session using this LSR-ID and will attempt to re-establish it using the new LSR-ID.
The no form of this command returns to the default behavior, in which case the system interface address is used as the LSR-ID.
Default
no local-lsr-id
Parameters
- interface-name
-
Specifies the name, up to 32 characters, of the network IP interface (which address is used as the LSR-ID of this LDP LSP). An interface name cannot be in the form of an IP address. If the string contains special characters (#, ?, space), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
- 32bit-format
-
Specifies the use of the IPv4 address of the local LSR-ID interface as the LSR-ID of this LDP LSR.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-max-checkpoints
local-max-checkpoints
Syntax
local-max-checkpoints [number-of-files]
no local-max-checkpoints
Context
[Tree] (config>system>rollback local-max-checkpoints)
Full Context
configure system rollback local-max-checkpoints
Description
This command configures the maximum number of rollback checkpoint files when the rollback-location is on local compact flash.
Default
no local-max-checkpoints
Parameters
- number of files
-
Specifies the maximum rollback files on a compact flash.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-monitoring-policer
local-monitoring-policer
Syntax
[no] local-monitoring-policer policer-name [create]
Context
[Tree] (config>sys>security>dist-cpu-protection>policy local-monitoring-policer)
Full Context
configure system security dist-cpu-protection policy local-monitoring-policer
Description
This command configures a monitoring policer that is used to monitor the aggregate rate of several protocols arriving on an object (for example, SAP). When the local-monitoring-policer is determined to be in a nonconforming state (at the end of a minimum monitoring time of 60 seconds) then the system will attempt to allocate dynamic policers for the particular object for any protocols associated with the local monitor (for example, using the protocol name enforcement dynamic policer-name CLI command).
If the system cannot allocate all the dynamic policers within 150 seconds, it will stop attempting to allocate dynamic policers, raise a LocMonExcdAllDynAlloc log event, and go back to using the local monitor. The local monitor may then detect exceeded packets again and make another attempt at allocating dynamic policers.
Once this policer-name is referenced by a protocol then this policer will be instantiated for each "object” that is created and references this DDoS policy. If there is no policer free then the object will be blocked from being created.
Parameters
- policy-name
-
Specifies name of the policy, up to 32 characters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-preference
local-preference
Syntax
local-preference local-preference
no local-preference
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group local-preference)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor local-preference)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp local-preference)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp group local-preference
configure service vprn bgp group neighbor local-preference
configure service vprn bgp local-preference
Description
This command enables setting the BGP local-preference attribute in incoming routes if not specified and configures the default value for the attribute. This value is used if the BGP route arrives from a BGP peer without the local-preference integer set.
The specified value can be overridden by any value set via a route policy. This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all peers), group level (applies to all peers in peer-group) or neighbor level (only applies to specified peer). The most specific value is used.
The no form of this command at the global level specifies that incoming routes with local-preference set are not overridden and routes arriving without local-preference set are interpreted as if the route had local-preference value of 100.
The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.
The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.
Default
no local-preference - Does not override the local-preference value set in arriving routes and analyze routes without local preference with value of 100.
Parameters
- local-preference
-
The local preference value to be used as the override value, expressed as a decimal integer.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-preference
Syntax
local-preference local-preference
no local-preference
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor local-preference)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp local-preference)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group local-preference)
Full Context
configure router bgp group neighbor local-preference
configure router bgp local-preference
configure router bgp group local-preference
Description
This command enables setting the BGP local-preference attribute in incoming routes if not specified and configures the default value for the attribute.
This value is used if the BGP route arrives from a BGP peer without the local-preference integer set.
The specified value can be overridden by any value set via a route policy. This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all peers), group level (applies to all peers in peer-group) or neighbor level (only applies to the specified peer). The most specific value is used.
The no form of this command at the global level specifies that incoming routes with local-preference set are not overridden and routes arriving without local-preference set are interpreted as if the route had local-preference value of 100.
The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.
The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.
Default
no local-preference
Parameters
- local-preference
-
Specifies the local preference value to be used as the override value expressed as a decimal integer.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-preference
Syntax
local-preference preference [equal | or-higher | or-lower]
no local-preference
Context
[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>entry>from local-preference)
Full Context
configure router policy-options policy-statement entry from local-preference
Description
This command matches BGP routes based on local preference (the value in the LOCAL_PREF attribute).
If no comparison qualifiers are present (equal, or-higher, or-lower), then equal is the implied default.
A non-BGP route does not match a policy entry if it contains the local-preference command.
Default
no local-preference
Parameters
- preference
-
Specifies the local preference value.
- equal
-
Specifies that matched routes should have the same local preference as the value specified.
- or-higher
-
Specifies that matched routes should have the same or a greater local preference as the value specified.
- or-lower
-
Specifies that matched routes should have the same or a lower local preference as the value specified.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-preference
Syntax
local-preference preference
no local-preference
Context
[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>default-action local-preference)
Full Context
configure router policy-options policy-statement default-action local-preference
Description
This command assigns a BGP local preference to routes matching a route policy statement entry.
If no local preference is specified, the BGP configured local preference is used.
The no form of this command disables assigning a local preference in the route policy entry.
Default
no local-preference
Parameters
- preference
-
Specifies the local preference expressed as a decimal integer.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-prefix
local-prefix
Syntax
local-prefix local-prefix [create]
no local-prefix local-prefix
Context
[Tree] (config>service>pw-routing local-prefix)
Full Context
configure service pw-routing local-prefix
Description
This command configures one or more node prefix values to be used for MS-PW routing. At least one prefix must be configured on each node that is an S-PE or a T-PE.
The no form of this command removes a previously configured prefix, and will cause the corresponding route to be withdrawn if it has been advertised in BGP.
Default
no local-prefix
Parameters
- local-prefix
-
Specifies a 32 bit prefix for the AII. One or more prefix values, up to a maximum of 16, may be assigned to the 7705 SAR Gen 2 node. The global ID can contain the 2-octet or 4-octet value of the provider's Autonomous System Number (ASN). The presence of a global ID based on the provider's ASN ensures that the AII for spoke-SDPs configured on the node will be globally unique.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-proxy-arp
local-proxy-arp
Syntax
[no] local-proxy-arp
Context
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if local-proxy-arp)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if local-proxy-arp)
Full Context
configure service ies interface local-proxy-arp
configure service vprn interface local-proxy-arp
Description
This command enables local proxy ARP. When local proxy ARP is enabled on an IP interface, the system responds to all ARP requests for IP addresses belonging to the subnet with its own MAC address, and thus becomes the forwarding point for all traffic between hosts in that subnet.
When local-proxy-arp is enabled, ICMP redirects on the ports associated with the service are automatically blocked.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-proxy-arp
Syntax
[no] local-proxy-arp
Context
[Tree] (config>router>if local-proxy-arp)
Full Context
configure router interface local-proxy-arp
Description
This command enables local proxy ARP on the interface.
Default
no local-proxy-arp
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-proxy-nd
local-proxy-nd
Syntax
[no] local-proxy-nd
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipv6 local-proxy-nd)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6 local-proxy-nd)
Full Context
configure service vprn interface ipv6 local-proxy-nd
configure service ies interface ipv6 local-proxy-nd
Description
This command enables local proxy neighbor discovery on the interface.
When this command is enabled, the interface replies to neighbor solicitation requests when both the hosts are on the same subnet. In this case, ICMP redirects are disabled. When this command is disabled, the interface does not reply to neighbor solicitation requests if both the hosts are on the same subnet.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-proxy-nd
Syntax
[no] local-proxy-nd
Context
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipv6 local-proxy-nd)
Full Context
configure router interface ipv6 local-proxy-nd
Description
This command enables local proxy neighbor discovery on the interface.
The no form of this command disables local proxy neighbor discovery.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-routes-domain-id
local-routes-domain-id
Syntax
local-routes-domain-id [global-field:local-field]
no local-routes-domain-id
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn local-routes-domain-id)
Full Context
configure service vprn local-routes-domain-id
Description
This command specifies the domain ID that is used in the D-PATH attribute for local routes before those routes are exported to a BGP neighbor using BGP-IPVPN, EVPN-IFF, EVPN-IFL or PE-CE BGP. A local route is a non-BGP route installed in the VPRN route table and learned using static route or an IGP.
The domain IDs are used in the D-PATH attribute, in accordance with draft-ietf-bess-evpn-ipvpn-interworking. The D-PATH attribute is modified by gateway routers, where a gateway is defined as a PE where a VPRN is instantiated, and that VPRN advertises or receives routes from multiple BGP owners (for example, EVPN-IFL and BGP-IPVPN).
The D-PATH attribute is used on gateways to detect loops (for received routes where the D-PATH contains a local domain ID) and to make BGP best path selection decisions based on the D-PATH length (shorter D-PATH is preferred).
The no form of this command removes the domain ID for local routes.
Default
no local-routes-domain-id
Parameters
- global-field:local-field
-
Specifies the domain ID for local routes.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-source-address
local-source-address
Syntax
local-source-address {ip-int-name | ip-address}
no local-source-address
Context
[Tree] (config>system>telemetry>persistent>subscription local-source-address)
Full Context
configure system telemetry persistent-subscriptions subscription local-source-address
Description
This command is used to assign a source IP address in the respective persistent subscription context for use when packets are sent out.
The no form of this command removes this address from the configuration.
Parameters
- ip-int-name
-
Specifies the source IP address name, up to 64 characters.
- ip-address
-
Specifies the source IP address.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-source-address
Syntax
local-source-address {ip-int-name | ip-address}
no local-source-address
Context
[Tree] (config>system>grpc-tunnel>destination-group>destination local-source-address)
Full Context
configure system grpc-tunnel destination-group destination local-source-address
Description
This command configures a local source IP address in the destination group context for use when packets are sent out.
The no form of this command removes this address from the configuration.
Default
no local-source-address
Parameters
- ip-int-name
-
Specifies the source IP address name, up to 64 characters.
- ip-address
-
Specifies the source IPv4 address (in dotted decimal notation) or IPv6 address.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-sr-protection
local-sr-protection
Syntax
local-sr-protection local-sr-protection
no local-sr-protection
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp local-sr-protection)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template local-sr-protection)
Full Context
configure router mpls lsp local-sr-protection
configure router mpls lsp-template local-sr-protection
Description
This command configures the SR LFA protection needed for the adjacencies used in the path computation of an SR-TE LSP by the local CSPF.
The default value of the command is preferred. The local CSPF will prefer a protected adjacency over an unprotected adjacency whenever both exist for a TE link. However, the entire computed path can combine both types of adjacencies.
When the user enables the mandatory value, CSPF uses it as an additional path constraint and selects protected adjacencies exclusively in computing the path of the SR-TE LSP. CSPF will return no path if all candidate paths that otherwise satisfy all other LSP path constraints do not have an unprotected SID for each of their TE links.
Similarly, if the user enables the value none, CSPF uses it as an additional path constraint and selects unprotected adjacencies exclusively in computing the path of the SR-TE LSP. CSPF will return no path if all candidate paths that otherwise satisfy all other LSP path constraints do not have a protected SID for each of their TE links.
The no form of this command returns the command to its default value.
Default
no local-sr-protection
Parameters
- local-sr-protection
-
Specifies the local-sr-protection for LSPs.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-user-db
local-user-db
Syntax
local-user-db local-user-db-name [create]
no local-user-db local-user-db-name
Context
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt local-user-db)
Full Context
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db
Description
Commands in this context configure a local user database.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Parameters
- local-user-db-name
-
Specifies the name of a local user database, up to 32 characters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
local-v6-ip
local-v6-ip
Syntax
local-v6-ip ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
local-v6-ip any
no local-v6-ip
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ipsec>sec-plcy>entry local-v6-ip)
[Tree] (config>router>ipsec>sec-plcy>entry local-v6-ip)
Full Context
configure service vprn ipsec security-policy entry local-v6-ip
configure router ipsec security-policy entry local-v6-ip
Description
This command specifies the local v6 prefix for the security-policy entry.
Parameters
- ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the local v6 prefix and length
- any
-
keyword to specify that it can be any address.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
location
location
Syntax
location cflash-id
no location
Context
[Tree] (config>system>persistence>nat-fwd location)
[Tree] (config>system>persistence>dhcp-server location)
[Tree] (config>system>persistence>ancp location)
Full Context
configure system persistence nat-port-forwarding location
configure system persistence dhcp-server location
configure system persistence ancp location
Description
This command instructs the system where to write the persistency files for the corresponding application. Each application creates two files on the flash card, one with suffix .i<version>, referencing an index file, and the other with suffix .0<version>, where <version> is a 2-digit number reflecting the file version. These versions are not related to the SR OS release running on the node. The <version> can remain the same over two major releases, for example, when no format change is made to the persistency file. On boot, the system scans the file systems looking for the corresponding persistency files, and the load begins.
For example, in the subscriber management context, the location specifies the flash device on a CPM card where the data for handling subscriber management persistency is stored.
The no form of this command returns the system to the default. If there is a change in file location while persistence is running, a new file will be written on the new flash, and then the old file will be removed.
Default
no location
Parameters
- cflash-id
-
Specifies the compact flash device name.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
location
Syntax
location location
no location
Context
[Tree] (config>system location)
Full Context
configure system location
Description
This command creates a text string that identifies the system location for the device.
Only one location can be configured. If multiple locations are configured, the last one entered overwrites the previous entry.
The no form of the command reverts to the default value.
Parameters
- location
-
Specifies the location as a character string. The string may be up to 80 characters. Any printable, seven-bit ASCII characters can be used within the string. If the string contains special characters (#, ?, space), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
location
Syntax
location file-url
no location
Context
[Tree] (config>system>script-control>script location)
Full Context
configure system script-control script location
Description
This command is used to identify the location of a script to be scheduled.
The no form of the command removes the location.
Default
no location
Parameters
- file-url
-
Specifies the location to search for scripts.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
location
Syntax
location cflash-id [backup-cflash-id]
no location
Context
[Tree] (config>log>file-id location)
Full Context
configure log file-id location
Description
This command specifies the primary and optional backup location where the log or billing file will be created.
The location command is optional. If the location command not explicitly configured, log files will be created on cf1: and accounting files will be created on cf2: without overflow onto other devices. Generally, cf3: is reserved for system files (configurations, images, and so on).
When multiple location commands are entered in a single file ID context, the last command overwrites the previous command.
When the location of a file ID that is associated with an active log ID is changed, the log events are not immediately written to the new location. The new location does not take effect until the log is rolled over either because the rollover period has expired or a clear log log-id command is entered to manually rollover the log file.
When creating files, the primary location is used as long as there is available space. If no space is available, an attempt is made to delete unnecessary files that are past their retention date.
If sufficient space is not available an attempt is made to remove the oldest to newest closed log or accounting files. After each file is deleted, the system attempts to create the new file.
A medium severity trap is issued to indicate that a compact flash is either not available or that no space is available on the specified flash and that the backup location is being used.
A high priority alarm condition is raised if none of the configured compact flash devices for this file ID are present or if there is insufficient space available. If space does become available, then the alarm condition will be cleared.
Log files are created on cf1: and accounting files are created on cf2.
Use the no form of this command to revert to default settings.
Default
no location
Parameters
- cflash-id
-
Specify the primary location.
- backup-cflash-id
-
Specify the secondary location.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
location
Syntax
location location-id [primary-ip-address ipv4-address] [secondary-ip-address ipv4-address] [tertiary-ip-address ipv4-address]
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>optimal-route-reflection location)
Full Context
configure router bgp optimal-route-reflection location
Description
This command configures the location ID for the for the route reflector. A BGP neighbor can be associated with a location if it is a route-reflector client.
Parameters
- location-id
-
Specifies an optimal-route-reflection location.
- ipv4-address
-
Specifies the primary, secondary, or tertiary IP address.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lock
lock
Syntax
[no] lock
Context
[Tree] (configure>system>security>profile>netconf>base-op-authorization lock)
Full Context
configure system security profile netconf base-op-authorization lock
Description
This command authorizes a user associated with the profile to send a NETCONF <lock> RPC. This lock RPC allows a NETCONF client to lock a configuration datastore.
The no form of the command denies the user from requesting a lock.
Default
no lock
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lock-override
lock-override
Syntax
[no] lock-override
Context
[Tree] (config>system>script-control>script-policy lock-override)
Full Context
configure system script-control script-policy lock-override
Description
This command allows a triggered EHS/CRON script to execute while there is a datastore lock, started by an MD interface, in place.
A triggered EHS/CRON script queues until an ongoing commit (or confirmed-commit) is done. When an EHS/CRON script is triggered while the lock-override CLI knob is on, SR OS behaves as follows.
When an exclusive session is in place:
-
Keep if it is an MD-CLI session. Disconnect if it is a NETCONF session
-
Lose the exclusive lock
-
Lose any uncommitted configuration changes
When a global session is in place:
-
Keep the MD-CLI or NETCONF session
-
Keep the uncommitted configuration changes
-
An update may be required after committing the EHS/CRON script configuration changes
The no form of this command does not allow the script to execute while there is a datastore lock in place.
Default
lock-override
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lockout
lockout
Syntax
lockout failed-attempts count duration duration-minutes block block-minutes [max-port-per-ip number-of-ports]
no lockout
Context
[Tree] (config>ipsec>ike-policy lockout)
Full Context
configure ipsec ike-policy lockout
Description
This command enables the lockout mechanism for the IPsec tunnel. The system will lock out an IPsec client for the configured time interval if the number of failed authentications exceeds the configured value within the specified duration. This command only applies when the system acts as a tunnel responder.
A client is defined as the tunnel IP address plus the port.
Optionally, the max-port-per-ip parameter can be configured as the maximum number of ports allowed behind the same IP address. If this threshold is exceeded, then all ports behind the IP address are blocked.
The no form of this command disables the lockout mechanism.
Default
no lockout
Parameters
- count
-
Specifies the maximum number of failed authentications allowed during the duration-minutes interval.
- duration-minutes
-
Specifies the interval of time, in minutes, during which the configured failed authentication count must be exceeded in order to trigger a lockout.
- block-minutes
-
Specifies the number of minutes that the client is blocked if the configured failed authentication count is exceeded.
- number-of-ports
-
Specifies the maximum number of ports allowed behind the same IP address.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lockout
Syntax
clear lockout {user user-name | all}
Context
[Tree] (admin>clear lockout)
Full Context
admin clear lockout
Description
This command is used to clear any lockouts for a specific user, or for all users.
Parameters
- user-name
-
Clears the locked username.
- all
-
Clears all locked usernames.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log
log
Syntax
log
Context
[Tree] (config log)
Full Context
configure log
Description
Commands in this context are used to configure both event logs and accounting logs. Event logs control the generation, dissemination and recording of system events for monitoring status and troubleshooting faults within the system. Event logging configuration includes syslog, snmp notifications (traps), NETCONF notifications and other types of event log outputs. Accounting logs collect comprehensive accounting statistics and write them to XML files on the compact flash in order to support a variety of billing models.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log
Syntax
[no] log
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>indirect>cpe-check log)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>next-hop>cpe-check log)
Full Context
configure service vprn static-route-entry indirect cpe-check log
configure service vprn static-route-entry next-hop cpe-check log
Description
This optional parameter enables the ability to log transitions between active and in-active based on the CPE connectivity check. Events will be sent to the system log, syslog and SNMP traps.
Default
no log
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log
Syntax
log
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn log)
Full Context
configure service vprn log
Description
Commands in this context configure event logging within a specific VPRN.
By default, the log events in a VPRN log are a subset of the complete set of possible log events in SR OS. See the config>log>services-all-events command for more details.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log
Syntax
log log-id
no log
Context
[Tree] (config>filter>ipv6-filter>entry log)
[Tree] (config>filter>ip-filter>entry log)
Full Context
configure filter ipv6-filter entry log
configure filter ip-filter entry log
Description
This command associates a filter log to the current filter policy entry and therefore enables logging for that filter entry.
The filter log must exist before a filter entry can be enabled to use the filter log.
The no form of the command disables logging for the filter entry.
Default
no log
Parameters
- log-id
-
Specifies the filter log ID expressed as a decimal integer.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log
Syntax
log log-id [create]
no log log-id
Context
[Tree] (config>filter log)
Full Context
configure filter log
Description
This command, creates a configuration context for the specified filter log if it does not exist, and enables the context to configure the specified filter log.
The no form of the command deletes the filter log. The log cannot be deleted if there are filter entries configured to write to the log. All filter entry logging associations need to be removed before the log can be deleted.
Default
log 101
Parameters
- log-id
-
Specifies the filter log ID expressed as a decimal integer.
- create
-
This keyword is required to create the configuration context. After it is created, the context can be enabled with or without the create keyword.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log
Syntax
[no] log
Context
[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>indirect>cpe-check log)
[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>next-hop>cpe-check log)
Full Context
configure router static-route-entry indirect cpe-check log
configure router static-route-entry next-hop cpe-check log
Description
This optional parameter enables the ability to log transitions between active and in-active based on the CPE connectivity check. Events will be sent to the system log, syslog and SNMP traps.
Default
no log
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log
Syntax
[no] log
Context
[Tree] (config>system>security>mgmt-access-filter>mac-filter>entry log)
[Tree] (config>system>security>mgmt-access-filter>ip-filter>entry log)
[Tree] (config>system>security>mgmt-access-filter>ipv6-filter>entry log)
Full Context
configure system security management-access-filter mac-filter entry log
configure system security management-access-filter ip-filter entry log
configure system security management-access-filter ipv6-filter entry log
Description
This command enables match logging. When enabled, matches on this entry will cause the Security event mafEntryMatch to be raised.
Default
no log
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log-events
log-events
Syntax
log-events [verbose]
no log-events
Context
[Tree] (config>sys>security>dist-cpu-protection>policy>local-monitoring-policer log-events)
Full Context
configure system security dist-cpu-protection policy local-monitoring-policer log-events
Description
This command controls the creation of log events related to local-monitoring-policer status and activity.
Default
log-events
Parameters
- verbose
-
Sends the same events as just "log-events” plus DcpLocMonExcd, DcpLocMonExcdAllDynAlloc, and DcpLocMonExcdAllDynFreed. The optional "verbose” includes some events that are more likely used during debug/tuning/investigations
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log-events
Syntax
[no] log-events [verbose]
no log-events
Context
[Tree] (config>sys>security>dist-cpu-protection>policy>protocol>dyn-para log-events)
Full Context
configure system security dist-cpu-protection policy protocol dynamic-parameters log-events
Description
This command controls the creation of log events related to dynamic enforcement policer status and activity.
Default
log-events
Parameters
- verbose
-
This parameter sends the same events as just "log-events” plus Hold Down Start, Hold Down End, DcpDynamicEnforceAlloc and DcpDynamicEnforceFreed events. This includes the allocation/de-allocation events (typically used for debug/tuning only – could be very noisy even when there is nothing much of concern).
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log-events
Syntax
log-events [verbose]
no log-events
Context
[Tree] (config>sys>security>dist-cpu-protection>policy>static-policer log-events)
Full Context
configure system security dist-cpu-protection policy static-policer log-events
Description
This command controls the creation of log events related to static-policer status and activity.
Default
log-events
Parameters
- verbose
-
Sends the same events as just "log-events” plus Hold Down Start and Down End events. The optional "verbose” includes some events that are more likely used during debug/tuning/investigations.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log-files-total-size
log-files-total-size
Syntax
log-files-total-size megabytes
no log-files-total-size
Context
[Tree] (config>log>storage log-files-total-size)
Full Context
configure log file-storage-control log-files-total-size
Description
This command configures the limit for the total space that all log files can occupy on each storage device on the active CPM.
When this threshold is reached, log events are no longer written to the files in the \log directory until SR OS removes older log files and the occupancy is below the limit.
When unconfigured, there is no specific limit for the total size of all log files.
Only log files in the \log directory with system generated names (including no file extension) are applicable toward the total size limit.
If a user manually adds or deletes log files from the \log directory, the size of the files is not taken into account for up to 1 hour.
The configured total size limit is not validated against the actual size of the installed storage devices. If the configured limit is larger than the installed CF device, the limit is never reached.
Default
no log-files-total-size
Parameters
- megabytes
-
Specifies the total size limit for log files, in MB.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log-filter
log-filter
Syntax
log-filter filter-id
no log-filter
Context
[Tree] (config>log>event-trigger>event>trigger-entry log-filter)
Full Context
configure log event-trigger event trigger-entry log-filter
Description
This command configures the log filter to be used for this trigger entry. The log filter defines the matching criteria that must be met in order for the log event to trigger the handler execution. The log filter is applied to the log event and, if the filtering decision results in a forward action, then the handler is triggered.
It is typically unnecessary to configure match criteria for the application or number in the log filter used for EHS since the particular filter is only applied for a specific log event application and number, as configured under the config>log>event-trigger context.
The no form of this command removes the log filter configuration.
Parameters
- filter-id
-
Specifies the identifier of the filter.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log-id
log-id
Syntax
log-id log-id [name log-name]
no log-id log-id
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>log log-id)
Full Context
configure service vprn log log-id
Description
This command creates a context to configure destinations for event streams.
The log-id context is used to direct events, alarms or traps, and debug information to respective destinations.
A maximum of 30 logs can be configured.
Before an event can be associated with this log-id, the from command identifying the source of the event must be configured.
Only one destination can be specified for a log-id. The destination of an event stream can be an in-memory buffer, console, session, snmp-trap-group, Syslog, or file.
Use the event-control command to suppress the generation of events, alarms, and traps for all log destinations.
An event filter policy can be applied in the log-id context to limit which events, alarms, and traps are sent to the specified log-id.
By default, the log events in a VPRN log are a subset of the complete set of possible log events in SR OS. See the config>log>services-all-events command for more details.
The no form of this command deletes the log destination ID from the configuration.
Default
No log destinations are defined.
Parameters
- log-id
-
Specifies the log ID number, expressed as a decimal integer.
- name log-name
-
Configures an optional log name, up to 64 characters, that can be used to refer to the log destination after it is created.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log-id
Syntax
log-id log-id [name log-name]
no log-id log-id
Context
[Tree] (config>log log-id)
Full Context
configure log log-id
Description
This command creates a context to configure destinations for event streams.
The log-id context is used to direct events, alarms or traps, and debug information for specific destinations.
A maximum of 30 logs can be configured.
Before an event can be associated with this log ID, the from command identifying the source of the event must be configured.
Only one destination can be specified for a log-id. The destination of an event stream can be an in-memory buffer, console, session, snmp-trap-group, syslog, or file.
Use the event-control command to suppress the generation of events, alarms, and traps for all log destinations.
An event filter policy can be applied in the log-id context to limit which events, alarms, and traps are sent to the specified log-id.
Log-IDs 99 and 100 are created by the agent. Log-ID 99 captures all log messages. Log-ID 100 captures log messages with a severity level of major and above.
Log-ID 99 provides valuable information for the admin-tech file. Removing or changing the log configuration may hinder debugging capabilities. It is strongly recommended not to alter the configuration for Log-ID 99.
The no form of this command deletes the log destination ID from the configuration.
Parameters
- log-id
-
Specifies the log ID, expressed as a decimal integer.
- name log-name
-
Configures an optional log name, up to 64 characters, that can be used to refer to the log destination after it is created.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log-prefix
log-prefix
Syntax
log-prefix log-prefix-string
no log-prefix
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>log>syslog log-prefix)
Full Context
configure service vprn log syslog log-prefix
Description
This command adds the string prepended to every syslog message sent to the syslog host.
RFC 3164, The BSD syslog Protocol, allows an alphanumeric string (tag) to be prepended to the content of every log message sent to the syslog host. This alphanumeric string can, for example, be used to identify the node that generates the log entry. The software appends a colon (:) and a space to the string and it is inserted in the syslog message after the date stamp and before the syslog message content.
Only one string can be entered. If multiple strings are entered, the last string overwrites the previous string. The alphanumeric string can contain lowercase (a-z), uppercase (A-Z) and numeric (0-9) characters.
The no form of this command removes the log prefix string.
Default
log-prefix "TMNX".
Parameters
- log-prefix-string
-
Specifies the alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters. Spaces and colons ( : ) cannot be used in the string.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
log-prefix
Syntax
log-prefix log-prefix-string
no log-prefix
Context
[Tree] (config>log>syslog log-prefix)
Full Context
configure log syslog log-prefix
Description
This command adds the string prepended to every syslog message sent to the syslog host.
RFC 3164, allows an alphanumeric string (tag) to be prepended to the content of every log message sent to the syslog host. This alphanumeric string can, for example, be used to identify the node that generates the log entry. The software appends a colon (:) and a space to the string and it is inserted in the syslog message after the date stamp and before the syslog message content.
Only one string can be entered. If multiple strings are entered, the last string overwrites the previous string. The alphanumeric string can contain lowercase (a-z), uppercase (A-Z) and numeric (0 to 9) characters.
The no form of this command removes the log prefix string.
Default
no log-prefix
Parameters
- log-prefix-string
-
Specifies an alphanumeric string up to 32 characters in length. Spaces and colons ( : ) cannot be used in the string.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
logger-event-bundling
logger-event-bundling
Syntax
[no] logger-event-bundling
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls logger-event-bundling)
Full Context
configure router mpls logger-event-bundling
Description
This feature merges two of the most commonly generated MPLS traps, vRtrMplsXCCreate and vRtrMplsXCDelete, which can be generated at both LER and LSR into a new specific trap vRtrMplsSessionsModified. In addition, this feature perform bundling of traps of multiple RSVP sessions, that is LSPs, into this new specific trap.
The intent is to provide a tool for the user to minimize trap generation in an MPLS network. Note that the MPLS trap throttling will not be applied to this new trap.
The no version of this command disables the merging and bundling of the above MPLS traps.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
login-banner
login-banner
Syntax
[no] login-banner
Context
[Tree] (config>system>login-control login-banner)
Full Context
configure system login-control login-banner
Description
This command enables or disables the display of a login banner. The login banner contains the SR OS copyright and build date information for a console login attempt.
The no form of this command causes only the configured pre-login-message and a generic login prompt to display.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
login-control
login-control
Syntax
login-control
Context
[Tree] (config>system login-control)
Full Context
configure system login-control
Description
This command creates the context to configure the session control for console, Telnet, SSH, and FTP sessions.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
login-exec
login-exec
Syntax
login-exec url-prefix: source-url
no login-exec
Context
[Tree] (config>system>security>user>console login-exec)
[Tree] (config>system>security>user-template>console login-exec)
Full Context
configure system security user console login-exec
configure system security user-template console login-exec
Description
This command configures a user’s login exec file which executes whenever the user successfully logs in to a console session.
Only one exec file can be configured. If multiple login-exec commands are entered for the same user, each subsequent entry overwrites the previous entry.
The no form of this command disables the login exec file for the user.
Default
no login-exec
Parameters
- url-prefix: source-url
-
Specifies either a local or remote URL, up to 200 characters, that identifies the exec file that is executed after the user successfully logs in.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
login-scripts
login-scripts
Syntax
login-scripts
Context
[Tree] (config>system>login-control login-scripts)
Full Context
configure system login-control login-scripts
Description
Commands in this context configure CLI scripts that execute when a user (authenticated via any method including local user database, TACACS+, or RADIUS) first logs into a CLI session.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
logout
logout
Syntax
logout
Context
[Tree] (logout)
Full Context
logout
Description
This command logs out of the router session.
When the logout command is issued from the console, the login prompt is displayed, and any log IDs directed to the console are discarded. When the console session resumes (regardless of the user), the log output to the console resumes.
When a Telnet session is terminated from a logout command, all log IDs directed to the session are removed. When a user logs back in, the log IDs must be re-created.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
long-lived
long-lived
Syntax
[no] long-lived
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>graceful-restart long-lived)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>graceful-restart long-lived)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor>graceful-restart long-lived)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp graceful-restart long-lived
configure service vprn bgp group graceful-restart long-lived
configure service vprn bgp group neighbor graceful-restart long-lived
Description
Commands in this context configure BGP Long-Lived Graceful-Restart (LLGR) procedures.
LLGR, known informally as BGP persistence, is an extension of BGP graceful restart that allows a session to stay down for a longer period of time. During this time, learned routes are marked and re-advertised as stale but they can continue to be used as routes of last resort.
The LLGR handling of a session failure can be invoked immediately or it can be delayed until the end of the traditional GR restart window.
Default
no long-lived
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
long-lived
Syntax
[no] long-lived
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>graceful-restart long-lived)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>graceful-restart long-lived)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor>graceful-restart long-lived)
Full Context
configure router bgp graceful-restart long-lived
configure router bgp group graceful-restart long-lived
configure router bgp group neighbor graceful-restart long-lived
Description
Commands in this context enter commands related to BGP Long-Lived Graceful-Restart (LLGR) procedures.
LLGR, known informally as BGP persistence, is an extension of BGP GR that allows a session to stay down for a longer period of time. During this time, learned routes are marked and re-advertised as stale but they can continue to be used as routes of last resort.
The LLGR handling of a session failure can be invoked immediately or it can be delayed until the end of the traditional GR restart window.
Default
no long-lived
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loop-detect
loop-detect
Syntax
loop-detect {drop-peer | discard-route | ignore-loop | off}
no loop-detect
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp loop-detect)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor loop-detect)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group loop-detect)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp loop-detect
configure service vprn bgp group neighbor loop-detect
configure service vprn bgp group loop-detect
Description
This command configures how the BGP peer session handles loop detection in the AS path.
This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all peers), group level (applies to all peers in peer-group) or neighbor level (only applies to specified peer). The most specific value is used.
Dynamic configuration changes of loop-detect are not recognized.
The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to default, which is loop-detect ignore-loop.
The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.
The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.
Default
loop-detect ignore-loop
Parameters
- drop-peer
-
Sends a notification to the remote peer and drops the session.
- discard-route
-
Discards routes received with loops in the AS path.
- ignore-loop
-
ignores routes with loops in the AS path but maintains peering.
- off
-
Disables loop detection.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loop-detect
Syntax
loop-detect {drop-peer | discard-route | ignore-loop | off}
no loop-detect
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group loop-detect)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor loop-detect)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp loop-detect)
Full Context
configure router bgp group loop-detect
configure router bgp group neighbor loop-detect
configure router bgp loop-detect
Description
This command configures how the BGP peer session handles loop detection in the AS path.
This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all peers), group level (applies to all peers in peer-group) or neighbor level (only applies to specified peer). The most specific value is used.
Dynamic configuration changes of loop-detect are not recognized.
The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to default, which is loop-detect ignore-loop.
The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.
The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.
Default
loop-detect ignore-loop
Parameters
- drop-peer
-
Sends a notification to the remote peer and drops the session.
- discard-route
-
Discards routes received from a peer with the same AS number as the router itself. This option prevents routes looped back to the router from being added to the routing information base and consuming memory. When this option is changed, the change will not be active for an established peer until the connection is re-established for the peer.
- ignore-loop
-
Ignores routes with loops in the AS path but maintains peering.
- off
-
Disables loop detection.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loop-detect-threshold
loop-detect-threshold
Syntax
loop-detect-threshold loop-detect-threshold
no loop-detect-threshold
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor loop-detect-threshold)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp loop-detect-threshold)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group loop-detect-threshold)
Full Context
configure service vprn bgp group neighbor loop-detect-threshold
configure service vprn bgp loop-detect-threshold
configure service vprn bgp group loop-detect-threshold
Description
This command provides additional control over the behavior enabled by the loop-detect command. If this command specifies a threshold value of n, then a route received by the local BGP speaker with an AS path that contains up to n occurrences of the local speaker's AS number is considered valid and not treated as an AS path loop. An AS loop is considered to occur only when the received AS path has more than n occurrences of the local speaker's AS number.
The no form of this command removes the configuration and sets the value to 0. One or more occurrence of the local speaker's AS number in the received AS path triggers the loop-detect behavior.
Default
no loop-detect-threshold
Parameters
- loop-detect-threshold
-
The maximum number of occurrences of the local speaker's AS number in the received AS path before the AS path is considered to be a loop.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loop-detect-threshold
Syntax
loop-detect-threshold loop-detect-threshold
no loop-detect-threshold
Context
[Tree] (config>router>bgp loop-detect-threshold)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor loop-detect-threshold)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group loop-detect-threshold)
Full Context
configure router bgp loop-detect-threshold
configure router bgp group neighbor loop-detect-threshold
configure router bgp group loop-detect-threshold
Description
This command provides additional control over the behavior enabled by the loop-detect command. If this command specifies a threshold value of n, then a route received by the local BGP speaker with an AS path that contains up to n occurrences of the local speaker's AS number is considered valid and not treated as an AS path loop. An AS loop is considered to occur only when the received AS path has more than n occurrences of the local speaker's AS number.
The no form of this command removes the configuration and sets the value to 0. One or more occurrence of the local speaker's AS number in the received AS path triggers the loop-detect behavior.
Default
no loop-detect-threshold
Parameters
- loop-detect-threshold
-
The maximum number of occurrences of the local speaker's AS number in the received AS path before the AS path is considered to be a loop.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loopback
loopback
Syntax
[no] loopback
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if loopback)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if loopback)
Full Context
configure service vprn interface loopback
configure service ies interface loopback
Description
This command specifies that the associated interface is a loopback interface that has no associated physical interface. As a result, the associated IES/VPRN interface cannot be bound to a SAP.
Configure an IES interface as a loopback interface by issuing the loopback command instead of the sap sap-id command. The loopback flag cannot be set on an interface where a SAP is already defined and a SAP cannot be defined on a loopback interface.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loopback
Syntax
[no] loopback
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nw-if loopback)
Full Context
configure service vprn network-interface loopback
Description
This command specifies that the associated interface is a loopback interface that has no associated physical interface. As a result, the associated interface cannot be bound to a SAP.
When using mtrace/mstat in a Layer 3 VPN context then the configuration for the VPRN should have a loopback address configured which has the same address as the core instance's system address (BGP next-hop).
Default
no loopback
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loopback
Syntax
[no] loopback
Context
[Tree] (config>router>if loopback)
Full Context
configure router interface loopback
Description
This command configures the interface as a loopback interface. The vas-if-type and loopback commands are mutually exclusive.
Default
Not enabled
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loopfree-alternate-exclude
loopfree-alternate-exclude
Syntax
[no] loopfree-alternate-exclude
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>level loopfree-alternate-exclude)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>interface loopfree-alternate-exclude)
[Tree] (config>router>isis>interface loopfree-alternate-exclude)
[Tree] (config>router>isis>level loopfree-alternate-exclude)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis level loopfree-alternate-exclude
configure service vprn isis interface loopfree-alternate-exclude
configure router isis interface loopfree-alternate-exclude
configure router isis level loopfree-alternate-exclude
Description
This command instructs IGP to not include a specific interface or all interfaces participating in a specific IS-IS level or OSPF area in the SPF LFA computation. This provides a way of reducing the LFA SPF calculation where it is not needed.
When an interface is excluded from the LFA SPF in IS-IS, it is excluded in both level 1 and level 2. When it is excluded from the LFA SPF in OSPF, it is excluded in all areas. However, the above OSPF command can only be executed under the area in which the specified interface is primary and once enabled, the interface is excluded in that area and in all other areas where the interface is secondary. If the user attempts to apply it to an area where the interface is secondary, the command will fail.
The no form of this command re-instates the default value for this command.
Default
no loopfree-alternate-exclude
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loopfree-alternate-exclude
Syntax
[no] loopfree-alternate-exclude
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3>area loopfree-alternate-exclude)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>if loopfree-alternate-exclude)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3>area>if loopfree-alternate-exclude)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area loopfree-alternate-exclude)
Full Context
configure service vprn ospf3 area loopfree-alternate-exclude
configure service vprn ospf area interface loopfree-alternate-exclude
configure service vprn ospf3 area interface loopfree-alternate-exclude
configure service vprn ospf area loopfree-alternate-exclude
Description
This command instructs IGP to not include a specific interface or all interfaces participating in a specific IS-IS level or OSPF area in the SPF LFA computation. This provides a way of reducing the LFA SPF calculation where it is not needed.
When an interface is excluded from the LFA SPF in IS-IS, it is excluded in both level 1 and level 2. When it is excluded from the LFA SPF in OSPF, it is excluded in all areas. However, the above OSPF command can only be executed under the area in which the specified interface is primary and once enabled, the interface is excluded in that area and in all other areas where the interface is secondary. If the user attempts to apply it to an area where the interface is secondary, the command fails.
The no form of this command re-instates the default value for this command.
Default
no loopfree-alternate-exclude
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loopfree-alternate-exclude
Syntax
[no] loopfree-alternate-exclude
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area loopfree-alternate-exclude)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area>interface loopfree-alternate-exclude)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf3>area loopfree-alternate-exclude)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf3>area>interface loopfree-alternate-exclude)
Full Context
configure router ospf area loopfree-alternate-exclude
configure router ospf area interface loopfree-alternate-exclude
configure router ospf3 area loopfree-alternate-exclude
configure router ospf3 area interface loopfree-alternate-exclude
Description
This command instructs IGP to not include a specific interface or all interfaces participating in a specific IS-IS level or OSPF area in the SPF LFA computation. This provides a way of reducing the LFA SPF calculation where it is not needed.
When an interface is excluded from the LFA SPF in IS-IS, it is excluded in both level 1 and level 2. When it is excluded from the LFA SPF in OSPF, it is excluded in all areas. However, the above OSPF command can only be executed under the area in which the specified interface is primary and once enabled, the interface is excluded in that area and in all other areas where the interface is secondary. If the user attempts to apply it to an area where the interface is secondary, the command will fail.
The no form of this command re-instates the default value for this command.
Default
no loopfree-alternate-exclude
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loopfree-alternates
loopfree-alternates
Syntax
[no] loopfree-alternates
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis loopfree-alternates)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis loopfree-alternates
Description
This command enables Loop-Free Alternate (LFA) computation by SPF under the IS-IS routing protocol level or under the OSPF routing protocol instance level.
When this command is enabled, it instructs the IGP SPF to attempt to pre-compute both a primary next-hop and an LFA next-hop for every learned prefix. When found, the LFA next-hop is populated into the routing table along with the primary next-hop for the prefix.
The no form of this command disables the LFA computation by IGP SPF.
Default
no loopfree-alternates
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loopfree-alternates
Syntax
[no] loopfree-alternates
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3 loopfree-alternates)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf loopfree-alternates)
Full Context
configure service vprn ospf3 loopfree-alternates
configure service vprn ospf loopfree-alternates
Description
This command enables Loop-Free Alternate (LFA) computation by SPF under the IS-IS routing protocol level, or under the OSPF routing protocol instance level.
When this command is enabled, it instructs the IGP SPF to attempt to pre-compute both a primary next-hop and an LFA next-hop for every learned prefix. IS-IS computes the primary SPF first and then computes the LFA SPF. The LFA backup next-hop is only available after the LFA SPF is completed. When found, the LFA next-hop is populated into the routing table along with the primary next-hop for the prefix.
The no form of this command disables the LFA computation by IGP SPF.
Default
no loopfree-alternates
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loopfree-alternates
Syntax
[no] loopfree-alternates
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis>flex-algos>flex-algo loopfree-alternates)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>flex-algos>flex-algo loopfree-alternates)
Full Context
configure router isis flexible-algorithms flex-algo loopfree-alternates
configure router ospf flexible-algorithms flex-algo loopfree-alternates
Description
This command enables the advertisement of flexible-algorithm aware loop free alternates (LFAs).
The flexible algorithm LFA configuration (for example, LFA, remote-LFA or TI-LFA) inherits the LFA configuration for base SPF algorithm 0.
LFAs are administratively disabled for flexible algorithms in which IS-IS is participating. LFAs must be explicitly enabled using the loopfree-alternates command.
The no form of this command disables LFAs for the specific flexible algorithm in which the router is participating.
Default
no loopfree-alternates
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loopfree-alternates
Syntax
[no] loopfree-alternates
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis loopfree-alternates)
Full Context
configure router isis loopfree-alternates
Description
This command enables Loop-Free Alternate (LFA) computation by SPF for the IS-IS routing protocol.
When this command is enabled, it instructs the IGP SPF to attempt to pre-compute both a primary nexthop and an LFA next-hop for every learned prefix. When found, the LFA next-hop is populated into the routing table along with the primary next-hop for the prefix.
The user enables the remote LFA next-hop calculation by the IGP LFA SPF by appending the remote-lfa option. When this option is enabled in an IGP instance, SPF performs the remote LFA additional computation following the regular LFA next-hop calculation when the latter resulted in no protection for one or more prefixes which are resolved to a given interface.
Remote LFA extends the protection coverage of LFA-FRR to any topology by automatically computing and establishing/tearing-down shortcut tunnels, also referred to as repair tunnels, to a remote LFA node which puts the packets back into the shortest without looping them back to the node which forwarded them over the repair tunnel. The remote LFA node is referred to as PQ node. A repair tunnel can in theory be an RSVP LSP, a LDP-in-LDP tunnel, or a SR tunnel. In this feature, it is restricted to use SR repair tunnel to the remote LFA node.
The remote LFA algorithm is a per-link LFA SPF calculation and not a per-prefix like the regular LFA one. So, it provides protection for all destination prefixes which share the protected link by using the neighbor on the other side of the protected link as a proxy for all these destinations.
The Topology-Independent LFA (TI-LFA) further improves the protection coverage of a network topology by computing and automatically instantiating a repair tunnel to a Q node which is not in shortest path from the computing node. The repair tunnel uses shortest path to the P node and a source routed path from the P node to the Q node.
In addition, the TI-LFA algorithm selects the backup path which matches the post-convergence path. This helps the capacity planning in the network since traffic will always flow on the same path when transitioning to the FRR next-hop and then onto the new primary next-hop.
At a high level, the TI-LFA protection algorithm is searching for a candidate P-Q set separated with a number of hops such that the label stack size does not exceed the value of ti-lfa max-sr-frr-labels, on each of the post-convergence paths to each destination node or prefix D.
When the ti-lfa option is enabled in IS-IS, it provides TI-LFA node-protect or link-protect backup path in IS-IS MT=0 for an SR-ISIS IPV4/IPv6 tunnel (node SID and adjacency SID), for an IPv4 SR-TE LSP, and for LDP IPv4 FEC when the LDP fast-reroute backup-sr-tunnel option is enabled.
The max-sr-frr-labels parameter is used to limit the search for the TI-LFA backup next-hop:
-
0 — The IGP LFA SPF restricts the search to TI-LFA backup next-hop which does not require a repair tunnel, meaning that P node and Q node are the same and match a neighbor. This is also the case when both P and Q node match the advertising router for a prefix.
-
1 to 3 — The IGP LFA SPF will widen the search to include a repair tunnel to a P node which itself is connected to the Q nodes with a 0-to-2 hops for a total of maximum of three labels: one node SID to P node and two adjacency SIDs from P node to the Q node. If the P node is a neighbor of the computing node, its node SID is compressed and meaning that up to three adjacency SIDs can separate the P and Q nodes.
-
2 (default) — Corresponds to a repair tunnel to a non-adjacent P which is adjacent to the Q node. If the P node is a neighbor of the computing node, then the node SID of the P node is compressed and the default value of two labels corresponds to two adjacency SIDs between the P and Q nodes.
When the node-protect command is enabled, the router will prefer a node-protect over a link-protect repair tunnel for a given prefix if both are found in the Remote LFA or TI-LFA SPF computations. The SPF computations may only find a link-protect repair tunnel for prefixes owned by the protected node. This node-protect backup protects against the failure of a downstream node in the path of the prefix of a node SID except for the node owner of the node SID.
The parameter max-pq-nodes in Remote LFA controls the maximum number of PQ nodes found in the LFA SPFs for which the node protection check is performed. The node-protect condition means the router must run the original Remote LFA algorithm plus one extra forward SPF on behalf of each PQ node found, potentially after applying the max-pq-cost parameter, to check if the path from the PQ node to the destination does not traverse the protected node. Setting this parameter to a lower value means the LFA SPFs will use less computation time and resources but may result in not finding a node-protect repair tunnel.
The no form of this command disables the LFA computation by IGP SPF.
Default
no loopfree-alternates
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loopfree-alternates
Syntax
[no] loopfree-alternates
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ospf loopfree-alternates)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf3 loopfree-alternates)
Full Context
configure router ospf loopfree-alternates
configure router ospf3 loopfree-alternates
Description
This command enables Loop-Free Alternate (LFA) computation by SPF under the OSPF or OSPFv3 routing protocol instance.
When this command is enabled, it instructs the IGP SPF to attempt to precalculate both a primary next hop and an LFA next hop for every learned prefix. When found, the LFA next hop is populated into the routing table along with the primary next hop for the prefix.
The user enables the remote LFA next hop calculation by the IGP LFA SPF by appending the remote-lfa option. When this option is enabled in an IGP instance, SPF performs the remote LFA additional computation following the regular LFA next hop calculation when the latter resulted in no protection for one or more prefixes which are resolved to a particular interface.
Remote LFA extends the protection coverage of LFA-FRR to any topology by automatically computing and establishing or tearing down shortcut tunnels, also referred to as repair tunnels, to a remote LFA node that puts the packets back into the shortest path without looping them back to the node that forwarded them over the repair tunnel. The remote LFA node is referred to as a PQ node. A repair tunnel can, in theory, be an RSVP-TE LSP, an LDP-in-LDP tunnel, or a segment routing (SR) tunnel. In this command, remote-lfa is restricted to using an SR repair tunnel to the remote LFA node.
The remote LFA algorithm is a per-link LFA SPF calculation and not a per-prefix calculation like the regular LFA algorithm. The remote LFA algorithm provides protection for all destination prefixes that share the protected link by using the neighbor on the other side of the protected link as a proxy for all the destinations.
The Topology-Independent LFA (TI-LFA) further improves the protection coverage of a network topology by computing and automatically instantiating a repair tunnel to a Q node which is not in shortest path from the computing node. The repair tunnel uses shortest path to the P node and a source routed path from the P node to the Q node.
In addition, the TI-LFA algorithm selects the backup path which matches the post-convergence path. This helps the capacity planning in the network since traffic will always flow on the same path when transitioning to the FRR next hop and then onto the new primary next hop.
At a high level, the TI-LFA protection algorithm is searching for a candidate P-Q set separated with a number of hops such that the label stack size does not exceed the value of ti-lfa max-sr-frr-labels, on each of the post-convergence paths to each destination node or prefix D.
When the ti-lfa option is enabled in OSPF, it provides TI-LFA node-protect or link-protect backup path for a SR-OSPF IPV4 tunnel (node SID and adjacency SID), and for a IPv4 SR-TE LSP.
The max-sr-frr-labels parameter is used to limit the search for the TI-LFA backup next hop:
-
0 — The IGP LFA SPF restricts the search to TI-LFA backup next hop which does not require a repair tunnel, meaning that P node and Q node are the same and match a neighbor. This is also the case when both P and Q node match the advertising router for a prefix.
-
1 to 3 — The IGP LFA SPF will widen the search to include a repair tunnel to a P node which itself is connected to the Q nodes with a 0-to-2 hops for a total of maximum of three labels: one node SID to P node and two adjacency SIDs from P node to the Q node. If the P node is a neighbor of the computing node, its node SID is compressed and meaning that up to three adjacency SIDs can separate the P and Q nodes.
-
2 (default) — Corresponds to a repair tunnel to a non-adjacent P which is adjacent to the Q node. If the P node is a neighbor of the computing node, then the node SID of the P node is compressed and the default value of two labels corresponds to two adjacency SIDs between the P and Q nodes.
The TI-LFA repair tunnel can have a maximum of three labels pushed in addition to the label of the destination node or prefix. The user can set a lower maximum value for the additional FRR labels by configuring the CLI option max-sr-frr-labels labels. The default value is 2.
When the node-protect command is enabled, the router will prefer a node-protect over a link-protect repair tunnel for a given prefix if both are found in the Remote LFA or TI-LFA SPF computations. The SPF computations may only find a link-protect repair tunnel for prefixes owned by the protected node. This node-protect backup protects against the failure of a downstream node in the path of the prefix of a node SID except for the node owner of the node SID.
The parameter max-pq-nodes in Remote LFA controls the maximum number of PQ nodes found in the LFA SPFs for which the node protection check is performed. The node-protect condition means the router must run the original Remote LFA algorithm plus one extra forward SPF on behalf of each PQ node found, potentially after applying the max-pq-cost parameter, to check if the path from the PQ node to the destination does not traverse the protected node. Setting this parameter to a lower value means the LFA SPFs will use less computation time and resources but may result in not finding a node-protect repair tunnel.
The no form of this command disables the LFA computation by the IGP SPF.
Default
no loopfree-alternates
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loss
loss
Syntax
loss
Context
[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session>ip>twamp-light loss)
Full Context
configure oam-pm session ip twamp-light loss
Description
Commands in this context configure loss parameters for the TWAMP-Light test.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loss-event
loss-event
Syntax
loss-event rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] [direction]
no loss-event
Context
[Tree] (config>saa>test loss-event)
Full Context
configure saa test loss-event
Description
Specifies that at the termination of an SAA test run, the calculated loss event value is evaluated against the configured rising and falling loss event thresholds. SAA threshold events are generated as required.
The configuration of loss event thresholds is optional.
The no form of this command disables the loss-event test run.
Parameters
- rising-threshold threshold
-
Specifies a rising threshold loss event value, in packets. When the test run is completed, the calculated loss event value is compared to the configured loss event rising threshold. If the test run loss event value is greater than the configured rising threshold value then an SAA threshold event is generated. The SAA threshold event is tmnxOamSaaThreshold, logger application OAM, event #2101.
- falling-threshold threshold
-
Specifies a falling threshold loss event value, in packets. When the test run is completed, the calculated loss event value is compared to the configured loss event falling threshold. If the test run loss event value is greater than the configured falling threshold value then an SAA threshold event is generated. The SAA threshold event is tmnxOamSaaThreshold, logger application OAM, event #2101.
- direction
-
Specifies the direction for OAM ping responses received for an OAM ping test run.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loss-events
loss-events
Syntax
[no] loss-events
Context
[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session>meas-intvl>event-mon loss-events)
Full Context
configure oam-pm session meas-interval event-mon loss-events
Description
This enables the monitoring of all configured loss events. Adding this functionality starts the monitoring of the configured loss events at the start of the next measurement interval. If the function is removed using the no command, all monitoring of configured loss events, logging, and recording of new events for that session are suspended. Any existing events at the time of the shutdown are maintained until the active measurement window in which the removal was performed has completed. The state of this monitoring function can be changed without having to shut down all the tests in the session.
The no form of this command disables the monitoring of all configured loss events.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
loss-events
Syntax
loss-events
Context
[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session>ip>twamp-light loss-events)
Full Context
configure oam-pm session ip twamp-light loss-events
Description
This context allows the operator to define the loss events and thresholds that are to be tracked.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
low
low
Syntax
low
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue>drop-tail low)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue>drop-tail low)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>queue-override>queue>drop-tail low)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>queue-override>queue>drop-tail low)
Full Context
configure service vpls sap ingress queue-override queue drop-tail low
configure service ies interface sap ingress queue-override queue drop-tail low
configure service vpls sap egress queue-override queue drop-tail low
configure service ies interface sap egress queue-override queue drop-tail low
Description
Commands in this context configure the queue low drop-tail parameters. The low drop tail defines the queue depth beyond which out-of-profile packets are not accepted into the queue and are discarded.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
low
Syntax
low
Context
[Tree] (config>port>eth>access>egr>qgrp>qover>q>drop-tail low)
[Tree] (config>port>eth>access>ing>qgrp>qover>q>drop-tail low)
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>network>egr>qgrp>qover>q>drop-tail low)
Full Context
configure port ethernet access egress queue-group queue-overrides queue drop-tail low
configure port ethernet access ingress queue-group queue-overrides queue drop-tail low
configure port ethernet network egress queue-group queue-overrides queue drop-tail low
Description
Commands in this context configure the queue low drop tail parameters. The low drop tail defines the queue depth beyond which out-of-profile packets will not be accepted into the queue and will be discarded.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
low
Syntax
low
Context
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue>drop-tail low)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue>drop-tail low)
Full Context
configure service epipe sap ingress queue-override queue drop-tail low
configure service epipe sap egress queue-override queue drop-tail low
Description
Commands in this context configure the queue low drop-tail parameters. The low drop tail defines the queue depth beyond which out-of-profile packets are not accepted into the queue and will be discarded.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
low
Syntax
low
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>queue-override>queue>drop-tail low)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue>drop-tail low)
Full Context
configure service vprn interface sap egress queue-override queue drop-tail low
configure service vprn interface sap ingress queue-override queue drop-tail low
Description
Commands in this context configure the queue low drop tail parameters. The low drop tail defines the queue depth beyond which out-of-profile packets are not accepted into the queue and will be discarded.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
low
Syntax
low
Context
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>queue>drop-tail low)
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>queue>drop-tail low)
Full Context
configure qos sap-ingress queue drop-tail low
configure qos sap-egress queue drop-tail low
Description
Commands in this context configure the queue low drop-tail parameters. The low drop tail defines the queue depth beyond which out-of-profile packets will not be accepted into the queue and will be discarded.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
low
Syntax
low
Context
[Tree] (config>qos>network-queue>queue>drop-tail low)
Full Context
configure qos network-queue queue drop-tail low
Description
Commands in this context configure the queue low drop tail parameters. The low drop tail defines the queue depth beyond which out-of-profile packets will not be accepted into the queue and will be discarded.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
low
Syntax
low
Context
[Tree] (config>qos>qgrps>ing>qgrp>queue>drop-tail low)
[Tree] (config>qos>qgrps>egr>qgrp>queue>drop-tail low)
Full Context
configure qos queue-group-templates ingress queue-group queue drop-tail low
configure qos queue-group-templates egress queue-group queue drop-tail low
Description
Commands in this context configure the queue low drop-tail parameters. The low drop tail defines the queue depth beyond which out-of-profile packets will not be accepted into the queue and will be discarded.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
low-octets-discarded-count
low-octets-discarded-count
Syntax
[no] low-octets-discarded-count
Context
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>queue>i-counters low-octets-discarded-count)
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>ref-queue>i-counters low-octets-discarded-count)
Full Context
configure log accounting-policy custom-record queue i-counters low-octets-discarded-count
configure log accounting-policy custom-record ref-queue i-counters low-octets-discarded-count
Description
This command includes the low octets discarded count.
The no form of this command excludes the low octets discarded count.
Default
no low-octets-discarded-count
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
low-octets-offered-count
low-octets-offered-count
Syntax
[no] low-octets-offered-count
Context
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>queue>i-counters low-octets-offered-count)
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>ref-queue>i-counters low-octets-offered-count)
Full Context
configure log accounting-policy custom-record queue i-counters low-octets-offered-count
configure log accounting-policy custom-record ref-queue i-counters low-octets-offered-count
Description
This command includes the low octets discarded count.
The no form of this command excludes the low octets discarded count.
Default
no low-octets-offered-count
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
low-packets-discarded-count
low-packets-discarded-count
Syntax
[no] low-packets-discarded-count
Context
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>queue>i-counters low-packets-discarded-count)
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>ref-queue>i-counters low-packets-discarded-count)
Full Context
configure log accounting-policy custom-record queue i-counters low-packets-discarded-count
configure log accounting-policy custom-record ref-queue i-counters low-packets-discarded-count
Description
This command includes the low packets discarded count.
The no form of this command excludes the low packets discarded count.
Default
no low-packets-discarded-count
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
low-packets-offered-count
low-packets-offered-count
Syntax
[no] low-packets-offered-count
Context
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>ref-queue>i-counters low-packets-offered-count)
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>queue>i-counters low-packets-offered-count)
Full Context
configure log accounting-policy custom-record ref-queue i-counters low-packets-offered-count
configure log accounting-policy custom-record queue i-counters low-packets-offered-count
Description
This command includes the low packets discarded count.
The no form of this command excludes the low packets discarded count.
Default
no low-packets-offered-count
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lower-bound
lower-bound
Syntax
lower-bound microseconds
no lower-bound
Context
[Tree] (config>oam-pm>bin-group>bin-type>bin lower-bound)
Full Context
configure oam-pm bin-group bin-type bin lower-bound
Description
This command allows the operator to specify the individual floors thresholds for the bins. The operator does not have to specific a lower threshold for every bin that was previously defined by the bin-count for the specific type. By default, each bin is the bin-number times 5000 microseconds. Lower thresholds in the previous adjacent bin must be lower than the threshold of the next higher bin threshold. A separate line per bin is required to configure an operator-specific threshold. An error prevents the bin from entering the active state if this is not maintained, at the time the no shutdown is issued. Bin 0 is the result of the difference between 0 and the configured lower-threshold of bin 1. The highest bin in the bin-count captures every result above the threshold. Any negative delay metric result is treated as zero and placed in bin 0.
The no form of this command removes the user configured threshold value and applies the default for the bin.
Parameters
- microseconds
-
Specifies the threshold that defines the floor of the bin. The bin range is the difference between its configured threshold and the threshold of the next higher bin in microsecond threshold value.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsa-accumulate
lsa-accumulate
Syntax
lsa-accumulate lsa-accumulate
no lsa-accumulate
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ospf3>timers lsa-accumulate)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>timers lsa-accumulate)
Full Context
configure router ospf3 timers lsa-accumulate
configure router ospf timers lsa-accumulate
Description
This command sets the internal OSPF delay to allow for the accumulation of multiple LSA so OSPF messages can be sent as efficiently as possible. The lsa-accumulate timer applies to all LSAs except Type 1 and Type 2 LSAs, which are sent immediately. LSAs are accumulated and then sent when:
-
its size reaches the MTU size of the interface
-
a new LSA is received on the interface
-
the lsa-accumulate timer expires
Shorting this delay can speed up the advertisement of LSAs to OSPF neighbors but may increase the number of OSPF messages sent.
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
The timer granularity is 10 ms if the value is less than 500 ms, and 100 ms if the value is greater than or equal to 500 ms. Timer values are rounded down to the nearest granularity, for example a configured value of 550 ms is internally rounded down to 500 ms.
Default
lsa-accumulate 1000
Parameters
- lsa-accumulate
-
Specifies the LSA accumulation delay in milliseconds.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsa-arrival
lsa-arrival
Syntax
lsa-arrival lsa-arrival-time
no lsa-arrival
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3>timers lsa-arrival)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>timers lsa-arrival)
Full Context
configure service vprn ospf3 timers lsa-arrival
configure service vprn ospf timers lsa-arrival
Description
This parameter defines the minimum delay that must pass between receipt of the same Link State Advertisements (LSAs) arriving from neighbors.
It is recommended that the neighbor’s configured lsa-generate lsa-second-wait interval is equal to or greater than the lsa-arrival timer configured here.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default.
The timer granularity is 10 ms if the value is less than 500 ms, and 100 ms if the value is ≥ 500 ms. Timer values are rounded down to the nearest granularity, for example a configured value of 550 ms is internally rounded down to 500 ms.
Default
lsa-arrival 1000
Parameters
- lsa-arrival-time
-
Specifies the timer in milliseconds.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsa-arrival
Syntax
lsa-arrival lsa-arrival-time
no lsa-arrival
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>timers lsa-arrival)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf3>timers lsa-arrival)
Full Context
configure router ospf timers lsa-arrival
configure router ospf3 timers lsa-arrival
Description
This parameter defines the minimum delay that must pass between receipt of the same Link State Advertisements (LSAs) arriving from neighbors.
It is recommended that the neighbors configured lsa-generate lsa-second-wait interval is equal or greater than the lsa-arrival timer configured here.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
The timer granularity is 10 ms if the value is less than 500 ms, and 100 ms if the value is greater than or equal to 500 ms. Timer values are rounded down to the nearest granularity, for example a configured value of 550 ms is internally rounded down to 500 ms.
Default
lsa-arrival 1000
Parameters
- lsa-arrival-time
-
Specifies the timer, in milliseconds.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsa-filter-out
lsa-filter-out
Syntax
lsa-filter-out [all | except-own-rtrlsa | except-own-rtrlsa-and-defaults]
no lsa-filter-out
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>if lsa-filter-out)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area>if lsa-filter-out)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3>area>if lsa-filter-out)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf3>area>if lsa-filter-out)
Full Context
configure service vprn ospf area interface lsa-filter-out
configure router ospf area interface lsa-filter-out
configure service vprn ospf3 area interface lsa-filter-out
configure router ospf3 area interface lsa-filter-out
Description
This command enables filtering of outgoing OSPF LSAs on the selected OSPFv2 or OSPFv3 interface. Three filtering options are provided:
-
Do not flood any LSAs out the interface. This option is suitable if the neighbor is simply-connected and has a statically configured default route with the address of this interface as next-hop.
-
Flood the router’s own router-LSA out the interface and suppress all other flooded LSAs. This option is suitable if the neighbor is simply-connected and has a statically configured default route with a loopback or system interface address (contained in the router-LSA) as next-hop.
-
Flood the router’s own router-LSA and all self-generated type-3, type-5 and type-7 LSAs advertising a default route (0/0) out the interface; suppress all other flooded LSAs. This option is suitable if the neighbor is simply-connected and does not have a statically configured default route.
The no form of this command disables OSPF LSA filtering (normal operation).
Default
no lsa-filter-out
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsa-generate
lsa-generate
Syntax
lsa-generate max-lsa-wait [lsa-initial-wait lsa-initial-wait [lsa-second-wait lsa-second-wait]]
no lsa-generate-interval
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3>timers lsa-generate)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>timers lsa-generate)
Full Context
configure service vprn ospf3 timers lsa-generate
configure service vprn ospf timers lsa-generate
Description
This parameter customizes the throttling of OSPF LSA-generation. Timers that determine when to generate the first, second, and subsequent LSAs can be controlled with this command. Subsequent LSAs are generated at increasing intervals of the lsa-second-wait timer until a maximum value is reached.
Configuring the lsa-arrival interval to equal or less than the lsa-second-wait interval configured in the lsa-generate command is recommended.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
The timer granularity is 10 ms if the value is less than 500 ms, and 100 ms if the value is ≥ 500 ms. Timer values are rounded down to the nearest granularity, for example a configured value of 550 ms is internally rounded down to 500 ms.
Parameters
- max-lsa-wait
-
Specifies the maximum interval, in milliseconds, between two consecutive occurrences of an LSA being generated.
- lsa-initial-wait
-
Specifies the first waiting period between link-state advertisements (LSA) originate(s), in milliseconds. When the LSA exceeds the lsa-initial-wait timer value and the topology changes, there is no wait period and the LSA is immediately generated.
When an LSA is generated, the initial wait period commences. If, within the specified lsa-initial-wait period and another topology change occurs, then the lsa-initial-wait timer applies.
- lsa-second-wait
-
Specifies the hold time in milliseconds between the first and second LSA generation. The next topology change is subject to this second wait period. With each subsequent topology change, the wait time doubles (this is 2x the previous wait time). This assumes that each failure occurs within the relevant wait period.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsa-generate
Syntax
lsa-generate max-lsa-wait [lsa-initial-wait lsa-initial-wait [lsa-second-wait lsa-second-wait]]
no lsa-generate
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ospf3>timers lsa-generate)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>timers lsa-generate)
Full Context
configure router ospf3 timers lsa-generate
configure router ospf timers lsa-generate
Description
This parameter customizes the throttling of OSPF LSA-generation. Timers that determine when to generate the first, second, and subsequent LSAs can be controlled with this command. Subsequent LSAs are generated at increasing intervals of the lsa-second-wait timer until a maximum value is reached.
Configuring the lsa-arrival interval to equal or less than the lsa-second-wait interval configured in the lsa-generate command is recommended.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
The timer granularity is 10 ms if the value is less than 500 ms, and 100 ms if the value is greater than or equal to 500 ms. Timer values are rounded down to the nearest granularity, for example a configured value of 550 ms is internally rounded down to 500 ms.
Default
lsa-generate 5000
Parameters
- max-lsa-wait
-
Specifies the maximum interval in milliseconds between two consecutive occurrences of an LSA being generated.
- lsa-initial-wait
-
Specifies the first waiting period between link-state advertisements (LSA) originate(s), in milliseconds. When the LSA exceeds the lsa-initial-wait timer value and the topology changes, there is no wait period and the LSA is immediately generated.
When an LSA is generated, the initial wait period commences. If, within the specified lsa-initial-wait period and another topology change occurs, then the lsa-initial-wait timer applies.
- lsa-second-wait
-
Specifies the hold time in milliseconds between the first and second LSA generation. The next topology change is subject to this second wait period. With each subsequent topology change, the wait time doubles (this is 2x the previous wait time). This assumes that each failure occurs within the relevant wait period.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsdb
lsdb
Syntax
[no] lsdb [level-number] [system-id | lsp-id]
Context
[Tree] (debug>router>isis lsdb)
Full Context
debug router isis lsdb
Description
This command enables debugging for Link State DataBase (LSDB).
The no form of the command disables debugging.
Parameters
- system-id
-
When specified, only the specified system-id is debugged. Host name up to 38 characters.
- lsp-id
-
When specified, only the specified lsp-id is debugged. Hostname up to 38 characters.
- level-number
-
Specifies the interface level (1, 2, or 1 and 2).
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsdb
Syntax
lsdb [type] [ls-id] [adv-rtr-id] [area area-id]
no lsdb
Context
[Tree] (debug>router>ospf3 lsdb)
[Tree] (debug>router>ospf lsdb)
Full Context
debug router ospf3 lsdb
debug router ospf lsdb
Description
This command enables debugging for an OSPF link-state database (LSDB).
Parameters
- type
-
Specifies the OSPF link-state database (LSDB) type.
- ls-id
-
Specifies an LSA type specific field containing either a router ID or an IP address. It identifies the piece of the routing domain being described by the advertisement.
- adv-rtr-id
-
Specifies the router identifier of the router advertising the LSA.
- area area-id
-
Specifies a 32-bit integer uniquely identifying an area.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsn
lsn
Syntax
lsn router router-instance [b4 ipv6-address] [aftr ipv6-address] ip ip-address protocol {tcp | udp} [port port] [outside-ip ipv4-address] [outside-port port] [nat-policy nat-policy-name] [force]
no lsn router router-instance [b4 ipv6-address] ip ip-address protocol {tcp | udp} port port [nat-policy nat-policy-name]
Context
[Tree] (config>service>nat>fwd lsn)
Full Context
configure service nat port-forwarding lsn
Description
This command creates NAT static port forwards for LSN44, Ds-Lite and NAT64. Static port forwards (SPF) are static mappings created so that certain applications on the inside (private side) can be reached from host that are on the outside of the NAT. SPF statically map the subscriber (inside IP address in LSN44, CPE IPv6 address/prefix in DS-Lite and IPv6 prefix in NAT64), inside port and protocol to an outside IPv4 address, port and the same protocol.
If only the inside router, the inside IPv4/v6 address/prefix and the protocol are configured as parameters in the SPF request, the remaining fields in the mapping (outside port and outside IPv4 address) will be selected automatically by the node and reported in CLI once the command execution is completed.
Specifying the outside IPv4 address in the SPF request, mandates that all other, otherwise optional, parameters be also specified in the request (inside port and outside port). This creates a fully specified SPF request. Fully specified SPF request can be used in multi-chassis NAT redundancy deployments where the SPF is manually replicated between the SR OS nodes. In single chassis NAT deployments, fully specified SPF request is guaranteed to work only in the system with a single MS-ISA in it. Otherwise (multiple MS-ISAs in the system) a conflict may arise where two distinct inside IP addresses that may reside on separate MS-ISAs are requested to be mapped to the same outside IPv4 address. This will not be possible since the outside IPv4 address cannot be split across the MS-ISAs (each IP address, inside or outside, is tied to a single MS-ISA).
In non-fully specified SPF requests (missing the inside port and/or outside port and the outside IPv4 address within the SPF request), the outside IPv4 address selection will depend on the configuration of the outside port in the SPF request:
-
If the outside port is not specified or is specified from the configured port-forwarding-range [1024..port-forwarding-range], then the outside IPv4 address will be the same as the outside IPv4 address in an existing dynamic mapping for the same subscriber. If the subscriber does not exist (no dynamic mappings exist at the time of SPF creation request), then the subscriber will be automatically created and an outside IPv4 address will be assigned. In case that the outside ports are not available from the outside IPv4 address of the corresponding dynamic mapping, then the SPF request will fail. In other words, the dynamic and static mappings (created in this manner) for the same subscriber must use the same outside IPv4 address.
-
If the outside port from the well-known port range [0 to 1023] is requested, then the outside IPv4 address does not have to match the outside IPv4 address of an existing dynamic mapping for the same subscriber, but can instead be any outside IPv4 address.
If multiple NAT policies per inside routing context are used, then the NAT policy must be specified in the SPF creation request. This is needed so the SPF be created in the correct pool.
SPFs are disabled by default and they must be explicitly enabled by the port-limits forwarding command within the NAT policy.
Configured SPFs, unlike SPFs created with the tools commands, are preserved across reboots without having to configure persistency (config>system>persistence>nat-port-forwarding) since they are part of the configuration. When the pool is shutdown the SPFs are deactivated. When the pool is enabled (no shutdown), the SPFs (as created by the tools command or by configuration) are activated.
To avoid possible persistency related conflicts, SPFs can only be created using one method on a given node: either as configuration (the CLI configure branch) or using the tools command. For example: if a first SPF entry is created via CLI tools commands, the node prevents SPF creation via configuration (the CLI configure branch) and vice versa.
The no form of the command deletes NAT static port forwards for LSN44, Ds-Lite and NAT64.
Parameters
- router router-instance
-
This mandatory parameter specifies the inside routing instance; router name or service-id.
- b4 ipv6-address
-
This optional parameter specifies the IPv6 address of the B4 element in DS-Lite.
- aftr ipv6-address
-
This optional parameter specifies IPv6 address of the AFTR element in DS-Lite.
- protocol {tcp | udp}
-
This mandatory parameter specifies the protocol to use, either TCP or UDP.
- port port
-
This optional parameter specifies a source port.
- outside-ip ipv4-address
-
This mandatory parameter specifies the outside IPv4 address. If the outside IPv4 address is specified, then all other optional parameters become mandatory.
- outside-port port
-
This optional parameter specifies the outside port.
- nat-policy policy-name
-
If multiple NAT policies are used inside the routing context, then the NAT policy should be specified in the SPF request so the SPF is created in the correct NAT pool. Otherwise, the default NAT policy from the inside routing context will be used.
- force
-
Force allocation of static port forwards.
This command is only applicable to a LSN44 pool with flexible port allocations. Such pools allow interleaving of static port forwards with other dynamically allocated ports triggered by traffic flow.
If the requested outside port in the static port forward command is already occupied by a dynamically allocated port, using the force keyword preempts the dynamically allocated port and reassigns it as a port forwarding port.
During preemption, all the flows associated with the dynamically allocated port are terminated.
When the requested port forward is occupied by another static port and not a dynamic port, the command fails even if the force keyword is configured.
When a static port forwarding command requests an arbitrary outside port that is not specified in the command, the force keyword has an effect if the entire port space is already occupied. In this case, one of the dynamic ports is preempted.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp
lsp
Syntax
[no] lsp lsp-name
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ldp>targ-session>peer>tunneling lsp)
Full Context
configure router ldp targeted-session peer tunneling lsp
Description
This command configures a specific LSP destined to this peer and to be used for tunneling of LDP FEC over RSVP. A maximum of 4 RSVP LSPs can be explicitly used for tunneling LDP FECs to the T-LDP peer.
It is not necessary to specify any RSVP LSP in this context unless there is a need to restrict the tunneling to selected LSPs. All RSVP LSPs with a to address matching that of the T-LDP peer are eligible by default. The user can also exclude specific LSP names by using the ldp-over-rsvp exclude command in the config>router>mpls>lsp context.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp
Syntax
[no] lsp lsp-name [bypass-only | p2mp-lsp | mpls-tp src-tunnel-num | sr-te]
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls lsp)
Full Context
configure router mpls lsp
Description
This command creates an LSP that is either signaled dynamically by the router, or a statically provisioned MPLS-TP LSP.
When the LSP is created, the egress router must be specified using the to command and at least one primary or secondary path must be specified for signaled LSPs, or at least one working path for MPLS-TP LSPs. All other statements under the LSP hierarchy are optional.
LSPs are created in the administratively down (shutdown) state.
The no form of this command deletes the LSP. All configuration information associated with this LSP is lost. The LSP must be administratively shutdown before it can be deleted. The LSP must also be unbound from all SDPs before it can be deleted.
Parameters
- lsp-name
-
Specifies the name that identifies the LSP. The LSP name can be up to 64 characters long and must be unique.
- bypass-only
-
Defines an LSP as a manual bypass LSP exclusively. When a path message for a new LSP requests bypass protection, the PLR first checks if a manual bypass tunnel satisfying the path constraints exists. If one if found, the router selects it. If no manual bypass tunnel is found, the router dynamically signals a bypass LSP in the default behavior. The CLI for this feature includes a knob that provides the user with the option to disable dynamic bypass creation on a per node basis.
- p2mp-lsp
-
Defines an LSP as a point-to-multipoint LSP. The following parameters can be used with a P2MP LSP: adaptive, adspec, cspf, exclude, fast-reroute, from, hop-limit, include, metric, retry-limit, retry-timer, resignal-timer. The following parameters cannot be used with a P2MP LSP: primary, secondary, to, dest-global-id, dest-tunnel-number, working-tp-path, protect-tp-path.
- mpls-tp src-tunnel-num
-
Defines an LSP as an MPLS-TP LSP. The src-tunnel-num is a mandatory create time parameter for mpls-tp LSPs, and has to be assigned by the user based on the configured range of tunnel IDs. The following parameters can only be used with an MPLS-TP LSP: to, dest-global-id, dest-tunnel-number, working-tp-path, protect-tp-path. Other parameters defined for the above LSP types cannot be used.
- sr-te
-
Defines an LSP of type Segment Routing Traffic Engineering (SR-TE) LSP. The user can associate an empty path or a path with strict or loose explicit hops with the primary path of the SR-TE LSP. A hop which corresponds to an adjacency SID must be identified with its far-end host IP address (next-hop) on the subnet. If the local end host IP address is provided, this hop is ignored since this router can have multiple adjacencies (next-hops) on the same subnet. A hop which corresponds to a node SID is identified by the prefix address. The user is only allowed to configure a primary path for the SR-TE LSP.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp
Syntax
[no] lsp lsp-name
Context
[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>indirect>tunnel-next-hop>resolution-filter>sr-te lsp)
[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>indirect>tunnel-next-hop>resolution-filter>rsvp-te lsp)
Full Context
configure router static-route-entry indirect tunnel-next-hop resolution-filter sr-te lsp
configure router static-route-entry indirect tunnel-next-hop resolution-filter rsvp-te lsp
Description
This command restricts the search for a resolving LSP to a specific set of named LSPs. Only those LSPs named in the associated name list will be searched for a match to resolve the associated static route.
Parameters
- lsp-name
-
Specifies the name of the LSP to be searched for a valid resolving tunnel for the static route's next-hop.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp
Syntax
[no] lsp lsp-name
Context
[Tree] (config>service>sdp lsp)
Full Context
configure service sdp lsp
Description
This command creates associations between one or more label switched paths (LSPs) and an Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) service destination point (SDP). This command is implemented only on MPLS-type encapsulated SDPs.
In MPLS SDP configurations either one or more LSP names can be specified or LDP can be enabled. The SDP ldp and lsp commands are mutually exclusive except if the mixed-lsp-mode option is also enabled. If an LSP is specified on an MPLS SDP, then LDP cannot be enabled on the SDP. To enable LDP on the SDP when an LSP is already specified, the LSP must be removed from the configuration using the no lsp lsp-name command.
Alternatively, if LDP is already enabled on an MPLS SDP, then an LSP cannot be specified on the SDP. To specify an LSP on the SDP, the LDP must be disabled or the mixed-lsp-mode option is also enabled. The LSP must have already been created in the config>router>mpls context. with a valid far-end IP address. RSVP must be enabled.
If no LSP is associated with an MPLS SDP, the SDP cannot enter the operationally up state. The SDP can be administratively enabled (no shutdown) with no LSP associations. The lsp-name may be shutdown, causing the association with the SDP to be operationally down (the LSP will not be used by the SDP).
Up to 16 LSP names can be entered on a single command line.
The no form of this command deletes one or more LSP associations from an SDP. If the lsp-name does not exist as an association or as a configured LSP, no error is returned. An lsp-name must be removed from all SDP associations before the lsp-name can be deleted from the system. The SDP must be administratively disabled (shutdown) before the last lsp-name association with the SDP is deleted.
Parameters
- lsp-name
-
Specifies the name of the LSP to associate with the SDP. An LSP name is case sensitive and is limited to 32 ASCII 7-bit printable characters with no spaces. If an exact match of lsp-name does not already exist as a defined LSP, an error message is generated. If the lsp-name does exist and the LSP to IP address matches the SDP far-end IP address, the association is created.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp
Syntax
lsp lsp-name
[no] lsp
Context
[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session>ip>tunnel>mpls>rsvp-te lsp)
Full Context
configure oam-pm session ip tunnel mpls rsvp-te lsp
Description
This command configures the name of the RSVP-TE LSP to transport the test packets.
The no form of this command removes the lsp-name from the configuration.
Parameters
- lsp-name
-
Specifies the LSP name, up to 64 characters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp
Syntax
lsp lsp-name
no lsp
Context
[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session>ip>tunnel>mpls>sr-te lsp)
Full Context
configure oam-pm session ip tunnel mpls sr-te lsp
Description
This command configures specification of SR-TE specific tunnel information that is used to transport the test packets. Entering this context removes all other tunnel type options configured under the configure oam-pm session ip tunnel mpls context. Only a single mpls type can be configured for an OAM-PM session.
The no form of this command removes the SR-TE LSP name from the configuration.
Default
no lsp
Parameters
- lsp-name
- Specifies the SR-TE LSP name, up to 64 characters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-bsid-block
lsp-bsid-block
Syntax
lsp-bsid-block name
no lsp-bsid-block
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls lsp-bsid-block)
Full Context
configure router mpls lsp-bsid-block
Description
This command configures a reference to a pre-existing reserved label block for statically configured binding SIDs.
The no form of this command removes the use of the label block as a pool of binding SIDs.
Parameters
- name
-
Specifies an existing reserved label block name, up to 64 characters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-exp
lsp-exp
Syntax
lsp-exp lsp-exp-value fc fc-name profile {in | out}
no lsp-exp
Context
[Tree] (config>qos>network>ingress lsp-exp)
Full Context
configure qos network ingress lsp-exp
Description
This command creates a mapping between the LSP EXP bits of the network ingress traffic and the forwarding class.
Ingress traffic that matches the specified LSP EXP bits will be assigned to the corresponding forwarding class. Multiple commands can be entered to define the association of some or all eight LSP EXP bit values to the forwarding class. For undefined values, packets are assigned to the forwarding class specified under the default-action command.
The no form of this command removes the association of the LSP EXP bit value to the forwarding class. The default-action then applies to that LSP EXP bit pattern.
Default
no lsp-exp
Parameters
- lsp-exp-value
-
Specify the LSP EXP values to be associated with the forwarding class.
- fc fc-name
-
Enter this required parameter to specify the fc-name that the EXP bit pattern will be associated with.
- profile {in | out}
-
Enter this required parameter to indicate whether the LSP EXP value is the in-profile or out-of-profile value.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-exp-in-profile
lsp-exp-in-profile
Syntax
lsp-exp-in-profile lsp-exp-value
no lsp-exp-in-profile
Context
[Tree] (config>qos>network>egress>fc lsp-exp-in-profile)
Full Context
configure qos network egress fc lsp-exp-in-profile
Description
This command specifies the in-profile LSP EXP value for the forwarding class. The EXP value will be used for all LSP labeled packets requiring marking that require marking at egress on this forwarding class queue, and that are in-profile. The inplus-profile traffic is marked with the same value as in-profile traffic.
When multiple EXP values are associated with the forwarding class at network egress, the last name entered will overwrite the previous value.
The no form of this command resets the configuration to the factory default in-profile EXP setting.
Default
Policy-id 1: |
Factory setting |
Policy-id 2 to 65535: |
Policy-id setting |
Parameters
- lsp-exp-value
-
Specifies the 3-bit LSP EXP bit value, expressed as a decimal integer.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-exp-out-profile
lsp-exp-out-profile
Syntax
lsp-exp-out-profile lsp-exp-value
no lsp-exp-out-profile
Context
[Tree] (config>qos>network>egress>fc lsp-exp-out-profile)
Full Context
configure qos network egress fc lsp-exp-out-profile
Description
This command specifies the out-of-profile LSP EXP value for the forwarding class. The EXP value will be used for all LSP labeled packets that require marking at egress on this forwarding class queue, and that are out-of-profile. The exceed-profile traffic is marked with the same value as out-of-profile traffic.
When multiple EXP values are associated with the forwarding class at network egress, the last name entered will overwrite the previous value.
The no form of this command resets the configuration to the factory default out-of-profile EXP setting.
Default
Policy-id 1: |
Factory setting |
Policy-id 2 to 65535: |
Policy-id setting |
Parameters
- mpls-exp-value
-
Specifies the 3-bit MPLS EXP bit value, expressed as a decimal integer.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-history
lsp-history
Syntax
[no] lsp-history
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls lsp-history)
Full Context
configure router mpls lsp-history
Description
This command allocates memory, which may be used to store up to the last 100 significant events for each RSVP-TE and SR-TE LSP.
The no form of this command deallocates memory for storing LSP history events and deletes any event history .
Default
no lsp-history
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-init-retry-timeout
lsp-init-retry-timeout
Syntax
lsp-init-retry-timeout seconds
no lsp-init-retry-timeout
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls lsp-init-retry-timeout)
Full Context
configure router mpls lsp-init-retry-timeout
Description
This command configures the initial LSP path retry-timer.
The new LSP path initial retry-timer is used instead of the retry-timer to abort the retry cycle when no RESV is received. The retry-timer exclusively governs the time between two retry cycles and to handle retrying of an LSP path in a failure case with PATH errors or RESVTear.
The intent is that the user can now control how many refreshes of the pending PATH state can be performed before starting a new retry-cycle with a new LSP ID. This is all done without affecting the ability to react faster to failures of the LSP path, which will continue to be governed by the retry-timer.
The no form of this command returns the timer to the default value.
Default
lsp-init-retry-timeout 30
Parameters
- seconds
-
Specifies the value (in s), used as the fast retry timer for a secondary path.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-lifetime
lsp-lifetime
Syntax
lsp-lifetime seconds
no lsp-lifetime
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis lsp-lifetime)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis lsp-lifetime
Description
This command sets the time, in seconds, the router wants the LSPs it originates to be considered valid by other routers in the domain.
Each LSP received is maintained in an LSP database until the lsp-lifetime expires unless the originating router refreshes the LSP. By default, each router refreshes its LSPs every 20 minutes (1200 seconds) so other routers will not age out the LSP.
The LSP refresh timer is derived from this formula: lsp-lifetime/2
LSPs originated by the router should be valid for 1200 seconds (20 minutes).
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
Default
lsp-lifetime 1200
Parameters
- seconds
-
Specifies the time, in seconds, that the router wants the LSPs it originates to be considered valid by other routers in the domain.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-lifetime
Syntax
lsp-lifetime seconds
no lsp-lifetime
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis lsp-lifetime)
Full Context
configure router isis lsp-lifetime
Description
This command sets the time, in seconds, the router wants the LSPs it originates to be considered valid by other routers in the domain.
Each LSP received is maintained in an LSP database until the lsp-lifetime expires unless the originating router refreshes the LSP. By default, each router refreshes its LSPs every 20 minutes (1200 seconds) so other routers will not age out the LSP.
The LSP refresh timer is derived from this formula: lsp-lifetime/2
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
Default
lsp-lifetime 1200
Parameters
- seconds
-
Specifies the time, in seconds, that the router wants the LSPs it originates to be considered valid by other routers in the domain.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime
lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime
Syntax
lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime seconds
no lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime
Description
This command configures the minimum value to which the remaining lifetime of the LSP is set. The value is a counter that decrements, in seconds, starting from the value in the received LSP (if not self-originated) or from lsp-lifetime seconds (if self-originated). When the remaining lifetime becomes zero, the contents of the LSP is purged. The remaining lifetime of an LSP is not changed when there is no lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime value configured.
The configured value must be greater than or equal to the lsp-lifetime value.
The no form of this command removes the seconds value from the configuration.
Default
no lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime
Parameters
- seconds
-
Specifies the decrementing counter, in seconds. The configured value must be greater than or equal to the locally configured value of lsp-lifetime (MaxAge).
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime
Syntax
lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime seconds
no lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime)
Full Context
configure router isis lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime
Description
This command configures the minimum value to which the remaining lifetime of the LSP is set. The value is a counter that decrements, in seconds, starting from the value in the received LSP (if not self-originated) or from lsp-lifetime seconds (if self-originated). When the remaining lifetime becomes zero, the contents of the LSP is purged. The remaining lifetime of an LSP is not changed when there is no lsp-minimum-remaining-lifetime value configured.
The configured value must be greater than or equal to the lsp-lifetime value.
The no form of this command removes the seconds value from the configuration.
Parameters
- seconds
-
Specifies the decrementing counter, in seconds. The configured value must be greater than or equal to the locally configured value of lsp-lifetime (MaxAge).
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-mtu-size
lsp-mtu-size
Syntax
lsp-mtu-size size
no lsp-mtu-size
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis lsp-mtu-size)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>level lsp-mtu-size)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis lsp-mtu-size
configure service vprn isis level lsp-mtu-size
Description
This command configures the LSP MTU size. If the size value is changed from the default using CLI or SNMP, then ISIS must be restarted for the change to take effect. This can be done by performing a shutdown command and then a no shutdown command in the config>router>isis context.
Using the exec command to execute a configuration file to change the LSP MTU size from its default value will automatically restart IS-IS for the change to take effect.
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
Default
lsp-mtu-size 1492
Parameters
- size
-
Specifies the LSP MTU size.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-mtu-size
Syntax
lsp-mtu-size size
no lsp-mtu-size
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis lsp-mtu-size)
[Tree] (config>router>isis>level lsp-mtu-size)
Full Context
configure router isis lsp-mtu-size
configure router isis level lsp-mtu-size
Description
This command configures the LSP MTU size. If the size value is changed from the default using CLI or SNMP, then IS-IS must be restarted in order for the change to take effect. This can be done by performing a shutdown command and then a no shutdown command in the config>router>isis context.
Using the exec command to execute a configuration file to change the LSP MTU-size from its default value automatically restarts IS-IS for the change to take effect.
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
Default
lsp-mtu-size 1492
Parameters
- size
-
Specifies the LSP MTU size.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-pacing-interval
lsp-pacing-interval
Syntax
lsp-pacing-interval milliseconds
no lsp-pacing-interval
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>if lsp-pacing-interval)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis interface lsp-pacing-interval
Description
This command configures the interval at which LSPs are sent from the interface.
To avoid overwhelming neighbors that have less CPU processing power with LSPs, the pacing interval can be configured to limit how many LSPs are sent at the interval. LSPs are sent in bursts at the interval up to the configured limit. If a value of 0 is configured, no LSPs are sent from the interface.
If configured to the default LSP pacing interval of 100, LSPs are sent in 100 millisecond intervals.
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
The IS-IS LSP pacing interval is 100 milliseconds for values < 100 milliseconds, and 1 second for values ≥ 100 milliseconds. For example, a pacing interval of 2 milliseconds means that a maximum of 50 LSPs are sent in a burst at 100 millisecond intervals. The default pacing interval of 100 milliseconds means that a maximum of 10 LSPs are sent in a burst at 1 second intervals.
Default
lsp-pacing-interval 100
Parameters
- milliseconds
-
Specifies the pacing interval in milliseconds at which IS-IS LSPs are sent from the interface at each interval expressed as a decimal integer.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-pacing-interval
Syntax
lsp-pacing-interval milliseconds
no lsp-pacing-interval
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis>interface lsp-pacing-interval)
Full Context
configure router isis interface lsp-pacing-interval
Description
This command configures the interval at which LSPs are sent from the interface.
To avoid overwhelming neighbors that have less CPU processing power with LSPs, the pacing interval can be configured to limit how many LSPs are sent at the interval. LSPs are sent in bursts at the interval up to the configured limit. If a value of 0 is configured, no LSPs are sent from the interface. The interval applies to all LSPs: LSPs generated by the router, and LSPs received from other routers.
If configured to the default LSP pacing interval of 100, LSPs are sent in 100 millisecond intervals.
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
The IS-IS LSP pacing interval is 100 milliseconds for values < 100 milliseconds, and 1 second for values ≥ 100 milliseconds. For example, a pacing interval of 2 milliseconds means that a maximum of 50 LSPs are sent in a burst at 100 millisecond intervals. The default pacing interval of 100 milliseconds means that a maximum of 10 LSPs are sent in a burst at 1 second intervals.
Default
lsp-pacing-interval 100
Parameters
- milli-seconds
-
Specifies the interval in milliseconds during which IS-IS LSPs are sent from the interface expressed as a decimal integer.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-ping
lsp-ping
Syntax
lsp-ping lsp-name [path path-name]
lsp-ping bgp-label prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-ping ldp prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-ping prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-ping rsvp-te lsp-name [path path-name]
lsp-trace sr-isis prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length [igp-instance igp-instance] [detail] [downstream-map-tlv downstream-map-tlv] [fc fc-name [profile {in | out}]] [flex-algo flex-algo-num] [interval interval] [max-fail no-response-count] [min-ttl min-label-ttl] [max-ttl max-label-ttl] [path-destination ip-address [interface if-name | next-hop ip-address]] [probe-count probes-per-hop] [size octets] [src-ip-address ip-address] [timeout timeout]
lsp-trace sr-ospf prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length [igp-instance igp-instance] [detail] [downstream-map-tlv downstream-map-tlv] [fc fc-name [profile {in | out}]] [flex-algo flex-algo-num] [interval interval] [max-fail no-response-count] [min-ttl min-label-ttl] [max-ttl max-label-ttl] [path-destination ip-address [interface if-name | next-hop ip-address]] [probe-count probes-per-hop] [size octets] [src-ip-address ip-address] [timeout timeout]
lsp-ping sr-ospf3 prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length [ igp-instance igp-instance] [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-ping sr-policy color color-id endpoint ip-address [segment-list segment-list-id] [detail] [ path-destination ip-address [{ interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-ping sr-te lsp-name [path path-name] [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-ping static lsp-name [assoc-channel {ipv4 | non-ip | none}] [dest-global-id global-id dest-node-id node-id] [force] [path-type {active | working | protect}]
NOTE: Options common to all lsp-ping cases: [detail] [fc fc-name [profile {in | out}]] [flex-algo flex-algo-num] [interval interval] [send-count send-count] [size octets] [src-ip-address ip-address] [timeout timeout] [ttl label-ttl]
Context
[Tree] (oam lsp-ping)
[Tree] (config>saa>test>type lsp-ping)
Full Context
oam lsp-ping
configure saa test type lsp-ping
Description
This command performs in-band LSP connectivity tests.
This command performs an LSP ping using the protocol and data structures defined in the RFC 8029, Detecting Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS) Data Plane Failures.
The LSP ping operation is modeled after the IP ping utility which uses ICMP echo request and reply packets to determine IP connectivity.
In an LSP ping, the originating device creates an MPLS echo request packet for the LSP and path to be tested. The MPLS echo request packet is sent through the data plane and awaits an MPLS echo reply packet from the device terminating the LSP. The status of the LSP is displayed when the MPLS echo reply packet is received.
This command, when used with the static option, performs in-band on-demand LSP connectivity verification tests for static MPLS-TP LSPs. For other LSP types, the static option should be excluded and these are described elsewhere in this user guide.
The lsp-ping static command performs an LSP ping using the protocol and data structures defined in the RFC 8029, Detecting Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS) Data Plane Failures, as extended by RFC 6426, MPLS On-Demand Connectivity Verification and Route Tracing.
In MPLS-TP, the echo request and echo reply messages are always sent in-band over the LSP, either in a G-ACh channel or encapsulated as an IP packet below the LSP label.
The timestamp format to be sent, and to be expected when received in a PDU, is as configured by the config>test-oam>mpls-time-stamp-format command. If RFC 4379 (obsoleted by RFC 8029) is selected, then the timestamp is in seconds and microseconds since 1900, otherwise it is in seconds and microseconds since 1970.
Default
The active LSP path
Values: Any path name associated with the LSP
Parameters
- lsp-name
-
Specifies the name of the target RSVP-TE LSP, up to 64 characters.
- rsvp-te lsp-name
-
Specifies the name of the target RSVP-TE LSP, up to 64 characters.
Note:The rsvp-te explicit target FEC type is not supported under the SAA context.
- path-name
-
Specifies the LSP path name, up to 32 characters, to which to send the LSP ping request.
- bgp-label prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the address prefix and subnet mask of the target BGP IPv4 /32 label route or the target BGP IPv6 /128 label route.
- path-destination ip-address
-
Specifies the IP address of the path destination from the range 127/8. When the LDP FEC prefix is IPv6, the user must enter a 127/8 IPv4 mapped IPv6 address, that is, in the range ::ffff:127/104.
ipv4-address:
a.b.c.d
ipv6-address:
x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)
x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d
x:
[0 to FFFF]H
d:
[0 to 255]D
- flex-algo flex-algo-num
-
Specifies the Segment Routing Flexible Algorithm for the test.
- interface if-name
-
Specifies the name of an IP interface, up to 32 characters, to send the MPLS echo request message to. The name must already exist in the config>router>interface context.
- next-hop ip-address
-
Specifies the next-hop address to send the MPLS echo request message to.
- prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the address prefix and subnet mask of the target LDP FEC.
- ldp prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the address prefix and subnet mask of the target LDP FEC.
- sr-isis prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the address prefix and subnet mask of the target node SID of the SR-IS-IS tunnel.
- igp-instance
-
Specifies the IGP instance of the node SID prefix.
- sr-ospf prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the address prefix and subnet mask of the target node SID of the SR-OSPF tunnel.
- sr-ospf3 prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the address prefix and subnet mask of the target node SID of the SR-OSPF3 tunnel. Note that only IPv6 prefixes in OSPFv3 instance ID 0-31 are supported.
- sr-policy color color-id endpoint ip-address segment-list segment-list-id
-
Specifies the name of the target IPv4 or IPv6 SR policy.
Note:The sr-policy target FEC type is supported under the OAM context and under type-multi-line node in the SAA context.
color color-id — Specifies the color ID.
Values 0 to 4294967295
endpoint ip-address — Specifies the endpoint address.
Values
ipv4-address:
a.b.c.d
ipv6-address:
x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)
x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d
x:
[0 to FFFF]H
d:
[0 to 255]D
segment-list segment-list-id — Specifies the segment list ID.
Values 1 to 32
- detail
-
Displays detailed information.
- sr-te lsp-name
-
Specifies the name of the target SR-TE LSP, up to 64 characters.
- static
-
Specifies the target FEC stack sub-type "Static LSP”.
- assoc-channel {ipv4 | non-ip | none}
-
Specifies the launched echo request’s usage of the Associated Channel (ACH) mechanism, when testing an MPLS-TP LSP.
- global-id
-
Specifies the MPLS-TP global ID for the far end node of the LSP under test. If this is not entered, then the dest-global-id is taken from the LSP context.
- node-id
-
Specifies the MPLS-TP global ID for the far end node of the LSP under test. If this is not entered, then the dest-global-id is taken from the LSP context.
- force
-
Allows LSP ping to test a path that is operationally down, including cases where MPLS-TP BFD CC/V is enabled and has taken a path down. This parameter is only allowed in the OAM context; it is not allowed for a test configured as a part of an SAA.
- path-type {active | working | protect}
-
The LSP path to test.
- fc-name
-
Specifies the FC and profile parameters that are used to indicate the forwarding class and profile of the MPLS echo request packet.
When an MPLS echo request packet is generated in CPM and is forwarded to the outgoing interface, the packet is queued in the egress network queue corresponding to the specified fc and profile parameter values. The marking of the packet's EXP is dictated by the LSP-EXP mappings on the outgoing interface.
When the MPLS echo request packet is received on the responding node, The FC and profile parameter values are dictated by the LSP-EXP mappings of the incoming interface.
When an MPLS echo reply packet is generated in CPM and is forwarded to the outgoing interface, the packet is queued in the egress network queue corresponding to the FC and profile parameter values determined by the classification of the echo request packet, which is being replied to, at the incoming interface. The marking of the packet's EXP is dictated by the LSP-EXP mappings on the outgoing interface. The ToS byte is not modified. lsp-ping Request Packet and Behavior summarizes this behavior.
Table 5. lsp-ping Request Packet and Behavior CPM (sender node)
Echo request packet:
-
packet {tos=1, fc1, profile1}
-
fc1 and profile1 are as entered by user in OAM command or default values
-
tos1 as per mapping of {fc1, profile1} to IP precedence in network egress QoS policy of outgoing interface
Outgoing interface (sender node)
Echo request packet:
-
packet queued as {fc1, profile1}
-
ToS field=tos1 not remarked
-
EXP=exp1, as per mapping of {fc1, profile1} to EXP in network egress QoS policy of outgoing interface
Incoming interface (responder node)
Echo request packet:
-
packet {tos1, exp1}
-
exp1 mapped to {fc2, profile2} as per classification in network QoS policy of incoming interface
CPM (responder node)
Echo reply packet:
-
packet{tos=1, fc2, profile2}
Outgoing interface (responder node)
Echo reply packet:
-
packet queued as {fc2, profile2}
-
ToS filed= tos1 not remarked (reply inband or out-of-band)
-
EXP=exp2, if reply is inband, remarked as per mapping of {fc2, profile2} to EXP in network egress QoS policy of outgoing interface
Incoming interface (sender node)
Echo reply packet:
-
packet {tos1, exp2}
-
exp2 mapped to {fc1, profile1} as per classification in network QoS policy of incoming interface
The LSP-EXP mappings on the receive network interface controls the mapping of the message reply at the originating router.
-
- profile {in | out}
-
Specifies the profile state of the MPLS echo request packet.
- flex-algo flex-algo-num
-
Specifies the Segment Routing Flexible Algorithm for the test. This option is only supported for oam lsp-ping sr-isis and oam lsp-ping sr-ospf. This option is not supported for SAA. If this option is not set, then the system looks up the prefix without flex-algo awareness.
- interval
-
Specifies the time, in seconds, used to override the default request message send interval and defines the minimum amount of time that must expire before the next message request is sent.
- send-count
-
Specifies the number of messages to send, expressed as a decimal integer. The send-count parameter is used to override the default number of message requests sent. Each message request must either time out or receive a reply before the next message request is sent. The message interval value must be expired before the next message request is sent.
- octets
-
Specifies the MPLS echo request packet size in octets, expressed as a decimal integer. The request payload is padded with zeros to the specified size.
- src-ip-address ip-address
-
Specifies the source IP address. This option is used when an OAM packet must be generated from a different address than the node’s system interface address. An example is when the OAM packet is sent over an LDP LSP and the LDP LSR-ID of the corresponding LDP session to the next-hop is set to an address other than the system interface address.
- timeout
-
Specifies number, in seconds, used to override the default timeout value and is the amount of time that the router waits for a message reply after sending the last probe for a specific test. Upon the expiration of the time out, the test is marked complete and no more packets are processed for any of those request probes.
- label-ttl
-
Specifies the TTL value for the MPLS label, expressed as a decimal integer.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
Output
Output ExampleThe following output is an example of LDP IPv4 and IPv6 prefix FECs.
A:Dut-C# oam lsp-ping prefix 4.4.4.4/32 detail
LSP-PING 4.4.4.4/32: 80 bytes MPLS payload
Seq=1, send from intf dut1_to_dut3, reply from 4.4.4.4
udp-data-len=32 ttl=255 rtt=5.23ms rc=3 (EgressRtr)
---- LSP 4.4.4.4/32 PING Statistics ----
1 packets sent, 1 packets received, 0.00% packet loss
round-trip min = 5.23ms, avg = 5.23ms, max = 5.23ms, stddev = 0.000ms
===============================================================================
LDP LSR ID: 1.1.1.1
===============================================================================
Legend: U - Label In Use, N - Label Not In Use, W - Label Withdrawn
WP - Label Withdraw Pending, BU - Alternate For Fast Re-Route
===============================================================================
LDP Prefix Bindings
===============================================================================
Prefix IngLbl EgrLbl EgrIntf/ EgrNextHop
Peer LspId
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.4.4.4/32 131069N 131067 1/1/1 1.3.1.2
3.3.3.3
4.4.4.4/32 131069U 131064 -- --
6.6.6.6
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. of Prefix Bindings: 2
===============================================================================
A:Dut-C#
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-ping prefix fc00::a14:106/128
LSP-PING fc00::a14:106/128: 116 bytes MPLS payload
Seq=1, send from intf A_to_B, reply from fc00::a14:106
udp-data-len=32 ttl=255 rtt=7.16ms rc=3 (EgressRtr)
---- LSP fc00::a14:106/128 PING Statistics ----
1 packets sent, 1 packets received, 0.00% packet loss
round-trip min = 7.16ms, avg = 7.16ms, max = 7.16ms, stddev = 0.000ms
*A:Dut-A#
lsp-ping over SR-ISIS
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-ping sr-isis prefix 10.20.1.6/32 igp-instance 0 detail
LSP-PING 10.20.1.6/32: 80 bytes MPLS payload
Seq=1, send from intf int_to_B, reply from 10.20.1.6
udp-data-len=32 ttl=255 rtt=1220324ms rc=3 (EgressRtr)
---- LSP 10.20.1.6/32 PING Statistics ----
1 packets sent, 1 packets received, 0.00% packet loss
round-trip min = 1220324ms, avg = 1220324ms, max = 1220324ms, stddev = 0.000ms
lsp-ping with SR-TE
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-ping sr-te "srteABCEDF" detail
LSP-PING srteABCEDF: 96 bytes MPLS payload
Seq=1, send from intf int_to_B, reply from 10.20.1.6
udp-data-len=32 ttl=255 rtt=1220325ms rc=3 (EgressRtr)
---- LSP srteABCEDF PING Statistics ----
1 packets sent, 1 packets received, 0.00% packet loss
round-trip min = 1220325ms, avg = 1220325ms, max = 1220325ms, stddev = 0.000ms
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-ping sr-te "srteABCE_loose" detail
LSP-PING srteABCE_loose: 80 bytes MPLS payload
Seq=1, send from intf int_to_B, reply from 10.20.1.5
udp-data-len=32 ttl=255 rtt=1220324ms rc=3 (EgressRtr)
---- LSP srteABCE_loose PING Statistics ----
1 packets sent, 1 packets received, 0.00% packet loss
round-trip min = 1220324ms, avg = 1220324ms, max = 1220324ms, stddev = 0.000ms
*A:Dut-F# oam lsp-ping sr-te "srteFECBA_eth" detail
LSP-PING srteFECBA_eth: 116 bytes MPLS payload
Seq=1, send from intf int_to_E, reply from fc00::a14:101
udp-data-len=32 ttl=255 rtt=1220326ms rc=3 (EgressRtr)
---- LSP srteFECBA_eth PING Statistics ----
1 packets sent, 1 packets received, 0.00% packet loss
round-trip min = 1220326ms, avg = 1220326ms, max = 1220326ms, stddev = 0.000ms
lsp-ping with SR-Policy
*A:Dut-A#
# ipv4 sr-policy lsp-ping
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-ping sr-policy color 200 endpoint 10.20.1.6 LSP-PING color 200 endpoint 10.20.1.6: 76 bytes MPLS payload Seq=1, send from intf int_to_C, reply from 10.20.1.6
udp-data-len=32 ttl=255 rtt=1220325ms rc=3 (EgressRtr)
---- LSP color 200 endpoint 10.20.1.6 PING Statistics ----
1 packets sent, 1 packets received, 0.00% packet loss round-trip min = 1220325ms, avg = 1220325ms, max = 1220325ms, stddev = 0.000ms
# ipv6 sr-policy lsp-ping
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-ping sr-policy color 200 endpoint fc00::a14:106 LSP-PING color 200 endpoint fc00::a14:106: 76 bytes MPLS payload Seq=1, send from intf int_to_C, reply from 10.20.1.6
udp-data-len=32 ttl=255 rtt=1220324ms rc=3 (EgressRtr)
---- LSP color 200 endpoint fc00::a14:106 PING Statistics ----
1 packets sent, 1 packets received, 0.00% packet loss round-trip min = 1220324ms, avg = 1220324ms, max = 1220324ms, stddev = 0.000ms
lsp-ping with sr-ospf3
# sr-ospf3 lsp-ping
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-ping sr-ospf3 prefix fc00::a14:106/128 LSP-PING fc00::a14:106/128: 116 bytes MPLS payload Seq=1, send from intf int_to_B, reply from fc00::a14:106
udp-data-len=32 ttl=255 rtt=3.17ms rc=3 (EgressRtr)
---- LSP fc00::a14:106/128 PING Statistics ----
1 packets sent, 1 packets received, 0.00% packet loss round-trip min = 3.17ms, avg = 3.17ms, max = 3.17ms, stddev = 0.000ms *A:Dut-A#
lsp-ping
Syntax
lsp-ping
Context
[Tree] (config>saa>test>type-multi-line lsp-ping)
Full Context
configure saa test type-multi-line lsp-ping
Description
Commands in this context configure the lsp-ping OAM probe type.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-ping-trace
lsp-ping-trace
Syntax
lsp-ping-trace [{tx | rx | both}] [{raw | detail}]
no lsp-ping-trace
Context
[Tree] (debug>oam lsp-ping-trace)
Full Context
debug oam lsp-ping-trace
Description
This command enables debugging for lsp-ping.
Parameters
- tx | rx | both
-
Specifies to enable LSP ping debugging for TX, RX, or both RX and TX for the for debug direction.
- raw | detail
-
Displays output for the for debug mode.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-refresh-interval
lsp-refresh-interval
Syntax
lsp-refresh-interval [seconds] [half-lifetime {enable | disable}]
no lsp-refresh-interval
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis lsp-refresh-interval)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis lsp-refresh-interval
Description
This command configures the IS-IS LSP refresh timer interval for the VPRN instance. When configuring the LSP refresh interval, the value that is specified for lsp-lifetime must also be considered. The LSP refresh interval cannot be greater than 90% of the LSP lifetime.
The no form of this command reverts to the default (600 seconds), unless this value is greater than 90% of the LSP lifetime. For example, if the LSP lifetime is 400, then the no lsp-refresh-interval command will be rejected.
Default
lsp-refresh-interval 600 half-lifetime enable
Parameters
- seconds
-
Specifies the refresh interval.
- half-lifetime
-
Sets the refresh interval to always be half the lsp-lifetime value. When this parameter is set to enable, the configured refresh interval is ignored.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-refresh-interval
Syntax
lsp-refresh-interval [seconds] [half-lifetime {enable | disable}
no lsp-refresh-interval
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis lsp-refresh-interval)
Full Context
configure router isis lsp-refresh-interval
Description
This command configures the IS-IS LSP refresh timer interval. When configuring the LSP refresh interval, the value that is specified for lsp-lifetime must also be considered. The LSP refresh interval cannot be greater than 90% of the LSP lifetime.
The no form of this command reverts to the default (600 seconds), unless this value is greater than 90% of the LSP lifetime. For example, if the LSP lifetime is 400, then the no lsp-refresh-interval command will be rejected.
Default
lsp-refresh-interval 600 half-lifetime enable
Parameters
- seconds
-
Specifies the refresh interval.
- half-lifetime
-
Sets the refresh interval to always be half the lsp-lifetime value. When this parameter is set to enable, the configured refresh interval is ignored.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-self-ping
lsp-self-ping
Syntax
lsp-self-ping {enable | disable | inherit}
no lsp-self-ping
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template lsp-self-ping)
Full Context
configure router mpls lsp-template lsp-self-ping
Description
This command enables LSP Self-ping on a given RSVP-TE LSP or LSP template. If set to disable, then LSP Self-ping is disabled irrespective of the setting of lsp-self-ping>rsvp-te under the mpls context. By default, each LSP and LSP template inherits this value.
The no form of this command reverts to the default.
Default
lsp-self-ping inherit
Parameters
- enable
-
Enables LSP Self-ping on this RSVP LSP or RSVP LSPs (one-hop-p2p or mesh-p2p) using this LSP template.
- disable
-
Disables LSP Self-ping on this RSVP LSP or RSVP LSPs using this LSP template.
- inherit
-
Inherits the value configured under config>router>mpls>lsp-self-ping>rsvp-te.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-setup
lsp-setup
Syntax
lsp-setup [detail]
no lsp-setup
Context
[Tree] (debug>router>mpls>event lsp-setup)
Full Context
debug router mpls event lsp-setup
Description
This command debugs LSP setup events.
The no form of the command disables the debugging.
Parameters
- detail
-
Displays detailed information about LSP setup events.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-template
lsp-template
Syntax
lsp-template template-name [mesh-p2p | mesh-p2p-srte | one-hop-p2p | on-demand-p2p-srte | one-hop-p2p-srte | p2mp | pce-init-p2p-srte template-id {default | template-id}]
no lsp-template template-name
Context
[Tree] (config>router>mpls lsp-template)
Full Context
configure router mpls lsp-template
Description
This command creates a template that can be referenced by a client application where dynamic LSP creation is required. The LSP template type (p2mp, one-hop-p2p, mesh-p2p, one-hop-p2p-srte, mesh-p2p-srte, pce-init-p2p-srte, or on-demand-p2p-srte) is mandatory.
The no form of this command deletes the LSP template. An LSP template cannot be deleted if a client application is using it.
Parameters
- template-name
-
Specifies the name of the LSP template, up to 32 characters. An LSP template name and LSP name must not be the same.
- mesh-p2p | mesh-p2p-srte | one-hop-p2p | one-hop-p2p-srte | p2mp | pce-init-p2p-srte | on-demand-p2p-srte
-
Identifies the type of LSP this template will signal.
- default
-
Sets the template to be the default LSP template for PCE-initiated SR-TE LSPs.
- template-id
-
Specifies the value that is signaled in the PCE to identify the LSP template.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-template
Syntax
lsp-template template-name
no lsp-template
Context
[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session>ip>tunnel>mpls>rsvp-te-auto lsp-template)
Full Context
configure oam-pm session ip tunnel mpls rsvp-te-auto lsp-template
Description
This command configures the name of the LSP template used to identify the unique LSP. Configure the following three commands to identify an RSVP-TE Auto LSP: from, to, and lsp-template. When all three of these values are configured, the specific RSVP LSP can be identified and the test packets can be carried across the tunnel
The no form of this command removes the LSP template name from the configuration.
Parameters
- template-name
-
Specifies the LSP template name, up to 32 characters.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-trace
lsp-trace
Syntax
lsp-trace lsp-name [path path-name] [detail]
lsp-trace bgp-label prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-trace ldp prefix ip-prefix/length [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-trace prefix ip-prefix/length [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-trace rsvp-te lsp-name [path path-name]
lsp-trace sr-isis prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length [igp-instance igp-instance] [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-trace sr-ospf prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length [ igp-instance igp-instance] [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-trace sr-ospf3 prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length [ igp-instance igp-instance] [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name| next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-trace sr-policy color color-id endpoint ip-address [segment-list segment-list-id] [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-trace sr-te lsp-name [path path-name] [path-destination ip-address [{interface if-name | next-hop ip-address}]]
lsp-trace static lsp-name [assoc-channel {ipv4 | non-ip | none}] [path-type {active | working | protect}]
NOTE: Options common to all lsp-trace cases: [detail] [downstream-map-tlv downstream-map-tlv] [fc fc-name [profile {in | out}]] [flex-algo flex-algo-num] [interval interval] [max-fail no-response-count] [max-ttl max-label-ttl] [min-ttl min-label-ttl] [probe-count probes-per-hop] [size octets] [src-ip-address ip-address] [timeout timeout]
Context
[Tree] (oam lsp-trace)
Full Context
oam lsp-trace
Description
This command performs an LSP traceroute using the protocol and data structures defined in IETF RFC 8029.
The LSP trace operation is modeled after the IP traceroute utility, which uses ICMP echo request and reply packets with increasing TTL values to determine the hop-by-hop route to a destination IP.
In an LSP trace, the originating device creates an MPLS echo request packet for the LSP to be tested with increasing values of the TTL in the outermost label. The MPLS echo request packet is sent through the data plane and awaits a TTL exceeded response or the MPLS echo reply packet from the device terminating the LSP. The devices that reply to the MPLS echo request packets with the TTL exceeded and the MPLS echo reply are displayed.
The downstream mapping TLV is used in lsp-trace to provide a mechanism for the sender and responder nodes to exchange and validate interface and label stack information for each downstream hop in the path of the LDP FEC an RSVP LSP, or a BGP IPv4 label route.
Two downstream mapping TLVs are supported. The original Downstream Mapping (DSMAP) TLV defined in RFC 4379 (obsoleted by RFC 8029) and the new Downstream Detailed Mapping (DDMAP) TLV defined in RFC 6424 AND RFC 8029. More details are provided in the DDMAP TLV sub-section below.
In addition, when the responder node has multiple equal cost next hops for an LDP FEC, a BGP label IPv4 prefix, an SR-ISIS node SID, an SR-OSPF node SID, or an SR-TE LSP, it replies in the Downstream Mapping TLV with the downstream information for each outgoing interface which is part of the ECMP next-hop set for the prefix. The downstream mapping TLV can further be used to exercise a specific path of the ECMP set using the path-destination option.
This command, when used with the static option, performs in-band on-demand LSP traceroute tests for static MPLS-TP LSPs. For other LSP types, the static option should be excluded and these are described elsewhere in this user guide.
The lsp-trace static command performs an LSP trace using the protocol and data structures defined in the RFC 8029, Detecting Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS) Data Plane Failures, as extended by RFC 6426, MPLS On-Demand Connectivity Verification and Route Tracing.
In MPLS-TP, the echo request and echo reply messages are always sent in-band over the LSP, either in a G-ACh channel or encapsulated as an IP packet below the LSP label.
The timestamp format to be sent, and to be expected when received in a PDU, is as configured by the configure test-oam mpls-time-stamp-format command. If RFC 4379 (obsoleted by RFC 8029) is selected, the timestamp is in seconds and microseconds since 1900, otherwise it is in seconds and microseconds since 1970.
Parameters
- lsp-name
-
Specifies the name of the target RSVP-TE LSP, up to 64 characters.
- rsvp-te lsp-name
-
Specifies the name of the target RSVP-TE LSP, up to 64 characters.
Note:The rsvp-te explicit target FEC type is not supported under the SAA context.
- path-name
-
Specifies the LSP path name along which to send the LSP trace request.
- bgp-label prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the address prefix and subnet mask of the target BGP IPv4 /32 label route or the target IPv6 /128 label route.
- path-destination ip-address
-
Specifies the IP address of the path destination from the range 127/8. When the LDP FEC prefix is IPv6, the user must enter a 127/8 IPv4 mapped IPv6 address, that is, in the range ::ffff:127/104.
- if-name
-
Specifies the name of an IP interface, up 32 characters, to send the MPLS echo request to. The name must already exist in the config>router>interface context.
- next-hop ip-address
-
Specifies the next hop to send the MPLS echo request message to.
- prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the address prefix and subnet mask of the target LDP FEC.
- ldp prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the address prefix and subnet mask of the target LDP FEC.
- sr-isis prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the address prefix and subnet mask of the target node SID of the SR-ISIS tunnel.
- igp-instance
-
Specifies the IGP instance of the node SID prefix.
- sr-ospf prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the address prefix and subnet mask of the target node SID of the SR-OSPF tunnel.
- sr-ospf3 prefix ip-prefix/prefix-length
-
Specifies the address prefix and subnet mask of the target node SID of the SR-OSPF3 tunnel. Only IPv6 prefixes in OSPFv3 instance ID 0-31 are supported.
- sr-policy color color-id endpoint ip-address segment-list segment-list-id
-
Specifies the name of the target IPv4 or IPv6 SR policy.
Note:The sr-policy target FEC type is supported under the OAM context and under type-multi-line node in the SAA context.
color color-id — Specifies the color ID.
- detail
-
Displays detailed information and allows the user to display hop 0 (that is, ingress) information. When this parameter is applied to static LSPs, the next hop 0 information is not displayed. This information is also not displayed if the min-ttl min-label-ttl value is greater than 1.
- sr-te lsp-name
-
Specifies the name of the target SR-TE LSP, up to 64 characters.
- static
-
Specifies the selection of the target FEC Stack sub-type "Static LSP”.
- assoc-channel {ipv4 | non-ip | none}
-
Specifies the launched echo request’s usage of the Associated Channel (ACH) mechanism, when testing an MPLS-TP LSP.
- path-type {active | working | protect}
-
Specifies the LSP path to test.
- downstream-map-tlv
-
Specifies which format of the downstream mapping TLV to use in the LSP trace packet. The DSMAP TLV is the original format in RFC 4379 (obsoleted by RFC 8029). The DDMAP is the new enhanced format specified in RFC 6424 and RFC 8029. The user can also choose not to include the downstream mapping TLV by entering the value none. When lsp-trace is used on a MPLS-TP LSP (static option), it can only be executed if the control-channel is set to none. In addition, the DSMAP/DDMAP TLV is only included in the echo request message if the egress interface is either a numbered IP interface, or an unnumbered IP interface. The TLV is not included if the egress interface is of type unnumbered-mpls-tp.
- fc-name
-
Specifies the FC and profile parameters are used to indicate the forwarding class and profile of the MPLS echo request packet.
When an MPLS echo request packet is generated in CPM and is forwarded to the outgoing interface, the packet is queued in the egress network queue corresponding to the specified FC and profile parameter values. The marking of the packet EXP is dictated by the LSP-EXP mappings on the outgoing interface.
When the MPLS echo request packet is received on the responding node, The FC and profile parameter values are dictated by the LSP-EXP mappings of the incoming interface.
When an MPLS echo reply packet is generated in CPM and is forwarded to the outgoing interface, the packet is queued in the egress network queue corresponding to the fc and profile parameter values determined by the classification of the echo request packet, which is being replied to, at the incoming interface. The marking of the packet's EXP is dictated by the LSP-EXP mappings on the outgoing interface. The ToS byte is not modified. lsp-trace Request Packet and Behavior summarizes this behavior.
Table 6. lsp-trace Request Packet and Behavior CPM (sender node)
Echo request packet:
-
packet {tos=1, fc1, profile1}
-
fc1 and profile1 are as entered by user in OAM command or default values
-
tos1 as per mapping of {fc1, profile1} to IP precedence in network egress QoS policy of outgoing interface
Outgoing interface (sender node)
Echo request packet:
-
pkt queued as {fc1, profile1}
-
ToS field=tos1 not remarked
-
EXP=exp1, as per mapping of {fc1, profile1} to EXP in network egress QoS policy of outgoing interface
Incoming interface (responder node)
Echo request packet:
-
packet {tos1, exp1}
-
exp1 mapped to {fc2, profile2} as per classification in network QoS policy of incoming interface
CPM (responder node)
Echo reply packet:
-
packet {tos=1, fc2, profile2}
Outgoing interface (responder node)
Echo reply packet:
-
pkt queued as {fc2, profile2}
-
ToS filed= tos1 not remarked (reply inband or out-of-band)
-
EXP=exp2, if reply is inband, remarked as per mapping of {fc2, profile2} to EXP in network egress QoS policy of outgoing interface
Incoming interface (sender node)
Echo reply packet:
-
packet {tos1, exp2}
-
exp2 mapped to {fc1, profile1} as per classification in network QoS policy of incoming interface
-
- profile {in | out}
-
Specifies the profile state of the MPLS echo request packet.
- interval
-
Specifies the number of seconds to override the default request message send interval and defines the minimum amount of time that must expire before the next message request is sent.
If the interval is set to 1 second, and the timeout value is set to 10 seconds, then the maximum time between message requests is 10 seconds and the minimum is 1 second. This depends upon the receipt of a message reply corresponding to the outstanding message request.
- no-response-count
-
Specifies the maximum number of consecutive MPLS echo requests, expressed as a decimal integer that do not receive a reply before the trace operation fails for a given TTL.
- max-label-ttl
-
Specifies the maximum TTL value in the MPLS label for the LDP treetrace test, expressed as a decimal integer.
- min-label-ttl
-
Specifies the minimum TTL value in the MPLS label for the LSP trace test, expressed as a decimal integer.
- probes-per-hop
-
Specifies the probes per hop.
- octets
-
Specifies the size in octets, expressed as a decimal integer, of the MPLS echo request packet, including the IP header but not the label stack. The request payload is padded with zeros to the specified size. Note that an OAM command is not failed if the user entered a size lower than the minimum required to build the packet for the echo request message. The payload is automatically padded to meet the minimum size.
- src-ip-address ip-address
-
Specifies the source IP address. This option is used when an OAM packet must be generated from a different address than the node’s system interface address. An example is when the OAM packet is sent over an LDP LSP and the LDP LSR-ID of the corresponding LDP session to the next-hop is set to an address other than the system interface address.
- timeout
-
Specifies the time, in seconds, used to override the default timeout value and is the amount of time that the router waits for a message reply after sending the message request. Upon the expiration of the message time out, the requesting router assumes that the message response is not received. A request timeout message is displayed by the CLI for each message request sent that expires. Any response received after the request times out is silently discarded.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
Output
Output Example*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.6/32 downstream-map-tlv ddmap path-
destination 127.0.0.1 detail lsp-trace to 10.20.1.6/
32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 152 byte packets
1 10.20.1.2 rtt=3.44ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=127.0.0.1 ifaddr=0 iftype=ipv4Unnumbered MRU=1500
label[1]=131070 protocol=3(LDP)
2 10.20.1.4 rtt=4.65ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=127.0.0.1 ifaddr=0 iftype=ipv4Unnumbered MRU=1500
label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
3 10.20.1.6 rtt=7.63ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 *A:Dut-A#
*A:Dut-C# oam lsp-trace "p_1" detail
lsp-trace to p_1: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 116 byte packets
1 10.20.1.2 rtt=3.46ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel)
DS 1: ipaddr 10.20.1.4 ifaddr 3 iftype 'ipv4Unnumbered' MRU=1500 label=131071
proto=4(RSVP-TE)
2 10.20.1.4 rtt=3.76ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel)
DS 1: ipaddr 10.20.1.6 ifaddr 3 iftype 'ipv4Unnumbered' MRU=1500 label=131071
proto=4(RSVP-TE)
3 10.20.1.6 rtt=5.68ms rc=3(EgressRtr)
*A:Dut-C#
lsp-trace over a numbered IP interface
A:Dut-C#
A:Dut-C# oam lsp-trace prefix 5.5.5.5/32 detail
lsp-trace to 5.5.5.5/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 104 byte packets
1 6.6.6.6 rtt=2.45ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel)
DS 1: ipaddr=5.6.5.1 ifaddr=5.6.5.1 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1564 label=131071
proto=3(LDP)
2 5.5.5.5 rtt=4.77ms rc=3(EgressRtr)
A:Dut-C#
lsp-trace over an unnumbered IP interface
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.6/32 downstream-map-tlv ddmap path-
destination 127.0.0.1 detail lsp-trace to 10.20.1.6/
32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 152 byte packets
1 10.20.1.2 rtt=3.44ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=127.0.0.1 ifaddr=0 iftype=ipv4Unnumbered MRU=1500
label[1]=131070 protocol=3(LDP)
2 10.20.1.4 rtt=4.65ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=127.0.0.1 ifaddr=0 iftype=ipv4Unnumbered MRU=1500
label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
3 10.20.1.6 rtt=7.63ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 *A:Dut-A#
*A:Dut-A# oam ldp-treetrace prefix 10.20.1.6/32
ldp-treetrace for Prefix 10.20.1.6/32:
127.0.0.1, ttl = 3 dst = 127.1.0.255 rc = EgressRtr status = Done
Hops: 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1, ttl = 3 dst = 127.2.0.255 rc = EgressRtr status = Done
Hops: 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
ldp-treetrace discovery state: Done
ldp-treetrace discovery status: ' OK '
Total number of discovered paths: 2
Total number of failed traces: 0
lsp-trace of a LDP IPv6 prefix FEC
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace prefix fc00::a14:106/128 path-destination ::ffff:127.0.0.1
lsp-trace to fc00::a14:106/128: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 224 byte packets
1 fc00::a14:102 rtt=1.61ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
2 fc00::a14:103 rtt=3.51ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
3 fc00::a14:104 rtt=4.65ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
4 fc00::a14:106 rtt=7.02ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace prefix fc00::a14:106/128 path-destination ::ffff:127.0.0.2
lsp-trace to fc00::a14:106/128: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 224 byte packets
1 fc00::a14:102 rtt=1.90ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
2 fc00::a14:103 rtt=3.10ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
3 fc00::a14:105 rtt=4.61ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
4 fc00::a14:106 rtt=6.45ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1
lsp-trace over SR-ISIS
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace sr-isis prefix 10.20.1.6/32 igp-instance 0 detail
lsp-trace to 10.20.1.6/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 108 byte packets
1 10.20.1.2 rtt=1220323ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.4.4 ifaddr=10.10.4.4 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26406 protocol=6(ISIS)
2 10.20.1.4 rtt=1220323ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.9.6 ifaddr=10.10.9.6 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26606 protocol=6(ISIS)
3 10.20.1.6 rtt=1220324ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1
*A:Dut-E# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.2/32 detail downstream-map-tlv ddmap
lsp-trace to 10.20.1.2/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 108 byte packets
1 10.20.1.3 rtt=3.25ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.3.2 ifaddr=10.10.3.2 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26202 protocol=6(ISIS)
fecchange[1]=POP fectype=LDP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.2 remotepeer=0.0.0.0 (Unknown)
fecchange[2]=PUSH fectype=SR Ipv4 Prefix prefix=10.20.1.2 remotepeer=10.10.3.2
2 10.20.1.2 rtt=4.32ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1
*A:Dut-E#
*A:Dut-B# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.5/32 detail downstream-map-tlv ddmap sr-isis
lsp-trace to 10.20.1.5/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 108 byte packets
1 10.20.1.3 rtt=2.72ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=10.11.5.5 ifaddr=10.11.5.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=262143 protocol=3(LDP)
fecchange[1]=POP fectype=SR Ipv4 Prefix prefix=10.20.1.5 remotepeer=0.0.0.0 (Unknown)
fecchange[2]=PUSH fectype=LDP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.5 remotepeer=10.11.5.5
2 10.20.1.5 rtt=4.43ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1
lsp-trace over SR policy
# ipv4 sr-policy lsp-trace
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace sr-policy color 2 endpoint 10.20.1.6 downstream-map-tlv ddmap path-destination 127.1.1.1 detail lsp-trace to color 2 endpoint 10.20.1.6: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 188 byte packets
1 10.20.1.2 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=4
1 10.20.1.2 rtt=1220323ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=3
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.3.3 ifaddr=10.10.3.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28303 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=28305 protocol=0(Unknown)
label[3]=28506 protocol=0(Unknown)
DS 2: ipaddr=10.10.12.3 ifaddr=10.10.12.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28303 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=28305 protocol=0(Unknown)
label[3]=28506 protocol=0(Unknown)
2 10.20.1.3 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=3
2 10.20.1.3 rtt=1220324ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.5.5 ifaddr=10.10.5.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28505 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=28506 protocol=0(Unknown)
DS 2: ipaddr=10.10.11.5 ifaddr=10.10.11.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28505 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=28506 protocol=0(Unknown)
3 10.20.1.5 rtt=1220325ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2
3 10.20.1.5 rtt=1220325ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.10.6 ifaddr=10.10.10.6 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28606 protocol=6(ISIS)
4 10.20.1.6 rtt=1220325ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1
# ipv6 sr-policy lsp-trace
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace sr-policy color 500 endpoint fc00::a14:106 lsp-trace to color 500 endpoint fc00::a14:106: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 204 byte packets
1 fc00::a14:102 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=4
1 fc00::a14:102 rtt=1220323ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=3
2 fc00::a14:103 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=3 ^C *A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace sr-policy color 500 endpoint fc00::a14:106 downstream-map-tlv ddmap path-destination ::ffff:127.1.1.1 detail lsp-trace to color 500 endpoint fc00::a14:106: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 260 byte packets
1 fc00::a14:102 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=4
1 fc00::a14:102 rtt=1220323ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=3
DS 1: ipaddr=fe80::c617:1ff:fe01:2 ifaddr=fe80::c617:1ff:fe01:2 iftype=ipv6Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28363 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=28365 protocol=0(Unknown)
label[3]=28566 protocol=0(Unknown)
DS 2: ipaddr=fe80::c415:ffff:fe00:141 ifaddr=fe80::c415:ffff:fe00:141 iftype=ipv6Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28363 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=28365 protocol=0(Unknown)
label[3]=28566 protocol=0(Unknown)
2 fc00::a14:103 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=3
2 fc00::a14:103 rtt=1220324ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2
DS 1: ipaddr=fe80::c61e:1ff:fe01:1 ifaddr=fe80::c61e:1ff:fe01:1 iftype=ipv6Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28565 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=28566 protocol=0(Unknown)
DS 2: ipaddr=fe80::c61e:1ff:fe01:5 ifaddr=fe80::c61e:1ff:fe01:5 iftype=ipv6Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28565 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=28566 protocol=0(Unknown)
3 fc00::a14:105 rtt=1220325ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2
3 fc00::a14:105 rtt=1220325ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=fe80::c420:1ff:fe01:2 ifaddr=fe80::c420:1ff:fe01:2 iftype=ipv6Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28666 protocol=6(ISIS)
4 fc00::a14:106 rtt=1220326ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 *A:Dut-A#
lsp-trace over SR-TE
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace sr-te "srteABCEDF" downstream-map-tlv ddmap detail
lsp-trace to srteABCEDF: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 252 byte packets
1 10.20.1.2 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=5
1 10.20.1.2 rtt=1220322ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=4
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.33.3 ifaddr=10.10.33.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1520
label[1]=3 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=262135 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[3]=262134 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[4]=262137 protocol=6(ISIS)
2 10.20.1.3 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=4
2 10.20.1.3 rtt=1220323ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=3
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.5.5 ifaddr=10.10.5.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=3 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=262134 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[3]=262137 protocol=6(ISIS)
3 10.20.1.5 rtt=1220325ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=3
3 10.20.1.5 rtt=1220325ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.11.4 ifaddr=10.10.11.4 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=3 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=262137 protocol=6(ISIS)
4 10.20.1.4 rtt=1220324ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2
4 10.20.1.4 rtt=1220325ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.9.6 ifaddr=10.10.9.6 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=3 protocol=6(ISIS)
5 10.20.1.6 rtt=1220325ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace sr-te "srteABCE_loose" downstream-map-tlv ddmap detail
lsp-trace to srteABCE_loose: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 140 byte packets
1 10.20.1.2 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=3
1 10.20.1.2 rtt=1220322ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.3.3 ifaddr=10.10.3.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26303 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=26305 protocol=6(ISIS)
DS 2: ipaddr=10.10.12.3 ifaddr=10.10.12.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26303 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=26305 protocol=6(ISIS)
DS 3: ipaddr=10.10.33.3 ifaddr=10.10.33.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26303 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=26305 protocol=6(ISIS)
2 10.20.1.3 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2
2 10.20.1.3 rtt=1220323ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.5.5 ifaddr=10.10.5.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26505 protocol=6(ISIS)
DS 2: ipaddr=10.10.11.5 ifaddr=10.10.11.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26505 protocol=6(ISIS)
3 10.20.1.5 rtt=1220324ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1
*A:Dut-F# oam lsp-trace sr-te "srteFECBA_eth" path-destination ::ffff:127.1.1.1 detail
lsp-trace to srteFECBA_eth: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 336 byte packets
1 fc00::a14:105 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=4
1 fc00::a14:105 rtt=1220323ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=3
DS 1: ipaddr=fe80::c618:2ff:fe01:1 ifaddr=fe80::c618:2ff:fe01:1 iftype=ipv6Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28363 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=74032 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[3]=28261 protocol=6(ISIS)
DS 2: ipaddr=fe80::c618:2ff:fe01:2 ifaddr=fe80::c618:2ff:fe01:2 iftype=ipv6Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28363 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=74032 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[3]=28261 protocol=6(ISIS)
2 fc00::a14:103 rtt=1220324ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=3
2 fc00::a14:103 rtt=1220324ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2
DS 1: ipaddr=fe80::c613:1ff:fe01:3 ifaddr=fe80::c613:1ff:fe01:3 iftype=ipv6Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=3 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=28261 protocol=6(ISIS)
3 fc00::a14:102 rtt=1220325ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2
3 fc00::a14:102 rtt=1220325ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=fe80::c0ea:1ff:fe01:1 ifaddr=fe80::c0ea:1ff:fe01:1 iftype=ipv6Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=28161 protocol=6(ISIS)
4 fc00::a14:101 rtt=1220325ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1
lsp-trace with sr-ospf3
# sr-ospf3 lsp-trace
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace sr-ospf3 prefix fc00::a14:106/128 detail lsp-trace to fc00::a14:106/128: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 164 byte packets
1 fc00::a14:102 rtt=1.33ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=fe80::c61c:1ff:fe01:1 ifaddr=fe80::c61c:1ff:fe01:1 iftype=ipv6Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=29466 protocol=5(OSPF)
2 fc00::a14:104 rtt=2.27ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
DS 1: ipaddr=fe80::c420:1ff:fe01:1 ifaddr=fe80::c420:1ff:fe01:1 iftype=ipv6Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=29666 protocol=5(OSPF)
3 fc00::a14:106 rtt=2.50ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1
First egress label with lsp-trace
lsp-trace to srteABCEDF_loose: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 216 byte packets 0 10.20.1.1
DS 1: ipaddr=10.101.1.2 ifaddr=10.101.1.2 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26202 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=26203 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[3]=26305 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[4]=26504 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[5]=26406 protocol=6(ISIS)
1 10.20.1.2 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=5
1 10.20.1.2 rtt=1220323ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=4
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.3.3 ifaddr=10.10.3.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26303 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=26305 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[3]=26504 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[4]=26406 protocol=6(ISIS)
DS 2: ipaddr=10.10.12.3 ifaddr=10.10.12.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26303 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=26305 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[3]=26504 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[4]=26406 protocol=6(ISIS)
2 10.20.1.3 rtt=1220323ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=4
2 10.20.1.3 rtt=1220323ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=3
DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.5.5 ifaddr=10.10.5.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26505 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=26504 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[3]=26406 protocol=6(ISIS)
DS 2: ipaddr=10.10.11.5 ifaddr=10.10.11.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
label[1]=26505 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[2]=26504 protocol=6(ISIS)
label[3]=26406 protocol=6(ISIS)
lsp-wait
lsp-wait
Syntax
lsp-wait lsp-wait lsp-initial-wait [initial-wait] [lsp-second-wait second-wait]
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>timers lsp-wait)
Full Context
configure service vprn isis timers lsp-wait
Description
This command configures the throttling of IS-IS LSP-generation. Timers that determine when to generate the first, second, and subsequent LSPs are controlled with this command. Subsequent LSPs are generated at increasing intervals of the second lsp-wait timer until a maximum value is reached.
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
Default
lsp-wait 5000 lsp-initial-wait 10 lsp-second-wait 1000
Parameters
- lsp-wait
-
Specifies the maximum interval, in milliseconds, between two consecutive occurrences of an LSP being generated.
- initial-wait
-
Specifies the initial LSP generation delay, in milliseconds. Values less than 100 ms are internally rounded down to 0, so that there is no added initial LSP generation delay.
- second-wait
-
Specifies the hold time, in milliseconds, between the first and second LSP generation.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsp-wait
Syntax
lsp-wait lsp-wait [lsp-initial-wait initial-wait] [lsp-second-wait second-wait]
Context
[Tree] (config>router>isis>timers lsp-wait)
Full Context
configure router isis timers lsp-wait
Description
This command configures the throttling of IS-IS LSP-generation. Timers that determine when to generate the first, second, and subsequent LSPs are controlled with this command. Subsequent LSPs are generated at increasing intervals of the second lsp-wait timer until a maximum value is reached.
The no form of this command reverts to the default value.
Default
lsp-wait 5000 lsp-initial-wait 10 lsp-second-wait 1000
Parameters
- lsp-wait
-
Specifies the maximum interval, in milliseconds, between two consecutive occurrences of an LSP being generated.
- initial-wait
-
Specifies the initial LSP generation delay, in milliseconds. Values less than 100 ms are internally rounded down to 0, so that there is no added initial LSP generation delay.
- second-wait
-
Specifies the hold time, in milliseconds, between the first and second LSP generation.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsr-label-route
lsr-label-route
Syntax
lsr-label-route [{none | all}]
Context
[Tree] (config>router>ttl-propagate lsr-label-route)
Full Context
configure router ttl-propagate lsr-label-route
Description
This command configures the TTL propagation for transit packets at a router acting as an LSR for a BGP label route.
When an LSR swaps the BGP label for a ipv4 prefix packet, therefore acting as a ABR, ASBR, or data-path Route-Reflector (RR) in the base routing instance, or swaps the BGP label for a vpn-ipv4 or vpn-ipv6 prefix packet, therefore acting as an inter-AS Option B VPRN ASBR or VPRN data path Route-Reflector (RR), the all value of this command enables TTL propagation of the decremented TTL of the swapped BGP label into all outgoing LDP or RSVP transport labels.
When an LSR swaps a label or stitches a label, it always writes the decremented TTL value into the outgoing swapped or stitched label. What this feature controls is whether this decremented TTL value is also propagated to the transport label stack pushed on top of the swapped or stitched label.
The none value reverts to the default mode which disables TTL propagation. This changes the existing default behavior which propagates the TTL to the transport label stack. When a customer upgrades, the new default becomes in effect. This command does not have a no version.
This feature also controls the TTL propagation at an LDP-BGP stitching LSR in the LDP to BGP stitching direction. It also controls the TTL propagation in Carrier Supporting Carrier (CsC) VPRN at both the CsC CE and CsC PE.
SR OS does not support ASBR or data path RR functionality for labeled IPv6 routes in the global routing instance (6PE). As such the CLI command of this feature has no impact on prefix packets forwarded in this context.
Default
lsr-label-route none
Parameters
- none
-
Specifies that the TTL of the swapped label is not propagated into the transport label stack.
- all
-
Specifies that the TTL of the swapped label is propagated into all labels of the transport label stack.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsr-load-balancing
lsr-load-balancing
Syntax
lsr-load-balancing hashing-algorithm
no lsr-load-balancing
Context
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nw-if>load-balancing lsr-load-balancing)
Full Context
configure service vprn network-interface load-balancing lsr-load-balancing
Description
This command specifies whether the IP header is used in the LAG and ECMP LSR hashing algorithm. This is the per interface setting.
Default
no lsr-load-balancing
Parameters
- lbl-only
-
Only the label is used in the hashing algorithm.
- lbl-ip
-
The IP header is included in the hashing algorithm.
- ip-only
-
The IP header is used exclusively in the hashing algorithm.
- eth-encap-ip
-
The hash algorithm parses down the label stack and once it hits the bottom, the stack assumes Ethernet II non-tagged/dot1q or qinq header follows. At the expected Ethertype offset location, algorithm checks whether the value present is IPv4/v6 (0x0800 or 0x86DD). If the check passes, the hash algorithm checks the first nibble at the expected IP header location for IPv4/IPv6 (0x0100/0x0110). If the secondary check passes, the hash is performed using IP SA/DA fields in the expected IP header; otherwise (if any of the checks failed) label-stack hash is performed.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsr-load-balancing
Syntax
lsr-load-balancing {lbl-only | lbl-ip | ip-only | eth-encap-ip | lbl-ip-l4-teid}
no lsr-load-balancing
Context
[Tree] (config>router>if>load-balancing lsr-load-balancing)
Full Context
configure router interface load-balancing lsr-load-balancing
Description
This command specifies whether the IP header is used in the LAG and ECMP LSR hashing algorithm. This is the per interface setting.
Default
no lsr-load-balancing
Parameters
- lbl-only
-
Specifies that only the label is used in the hashing algorithm
- lbl-ip
-
Specifies that only the IP header is included in the hashing algorithm.
- ip-only
-
Specifies that only the IP header is used exclusively in the hashing algorithm
- eth-encap-ip
-
Specifies that the hash algorithm parses down the label stack and once it hits the bottom, the stack assumes Ethernet II non-tagged/dot1q or qinq header follows. At the expected Ethertype offset location, algorithm checks whether the value present is IPv4/v6 (0x0800 or0x86DD). If the check passes, the hash algorithm checks the first nibble at the expected IP header location for IPv4/IPv6 (0x0100/0x0110). If the secondary check passes, the hash is performed using IP SA/DA fields in the expected IP header; otherwise (any of the check failed) label-stack hash is performed.
- lbl-ip-l4-teid
-
Specifies that this hashing algorithm hashes based on label, IP header, Layer 4 header and GTP header (TEID) in order. The algorithm uses all the supported headers that are found in the header fragment of incoming traffic.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2
lsr-load-balancing
Syntax
lsr-load-balancing hashing-algorithm
no lsr-load-balancing
Context
[Tree] (config>system>load-balancing lsr-load-balancing)
Full Context
configure system load-balancing lsr-load-balancing
Description
This command configures system-wide LSR load balancing. Hashing can be enabled on the label stack, IP header, or both. The hashing can be at an LSR for spraying labeled IP packets over multiple equal-cost paths, or over multiple links of a LAG group.
For IPv4 packets, the LSR hash routine operates on the label stack and the IP header. An LSR considers a packet to be IPv4 if the first nibble following the bottom of the label stack is 4. You can enable or disable hashing on the label stack and IPv4 and IPv6 headers at the system level or incoming network IP interface level.
Default
no lsr-load-balancing
Parameters
- lbl-only
-
Specifies that only the label is used in the hashing algorithm.
- lbl-ip
-
Specifies that the IP header is included in the hashing algorithm.
- ip-only
-
Specifies that the IP header is used exclusively in the hashing algorithm.
- eth-encap-ip
-
Specifies that the hash algorithm parses down the label stack and after it reaches the bottom, the stack assumes the Ethernet II non-tagged, dot1q, or QinQ header follows. At the expected Ethertype offset location, the algorithm checks whether the value present is IPv4/IPv6 (0x0800/0x86DD). If the check passes, the hash algorithm checks the first nibble at the expected IP header location for IPv4/IPv6 (0x0100/0x0110). If the secondary check passes, the algorithm performs the hash using the IP SA/DA fields in the expected IP header. If any of the checks fail, the label-stack hash is performed.
- lbl-ip-l4-teid
-
Specifies that the hashing applies as follows for Layer 2 and Layer 3 encapsulated traffic:
- If an IPv4 or IPv6 header is found immediately after the MPLS label stack, the hashing includes label stack, source and destination IP addresses, TCP/UDP port numbers, and, if present, TEID values.
- If an IPv4 or IPv6 header is not found immediately after the MPLS label stack, the data plane searches for a valid Ethertype value for the IPv4 and IPv6 payload. If a valid Ethertype value is found and an IP header follows the Ethernet header, hashing includes the source and destination IP addresses, TCP/UDP port numbers, and, if present, TEID values.
Platforms
7705 SAR Gen 2